Ford Automobile 2010 Mustang User Manual

Table of Contents

Introduction

Instrument Cluster

Warning lights and chimes

Gauges

Message center

Entertainment Systems

Auxiliary input jack (Line in)

USB port

Satellite radio information

Navigation system

SYNC௡

Climate Controls

Manual heating and air conditioning

Navigation system based climate control

Rear window defroster

Lights

Headlamps

Turn signal control

Bulb replacement

Driver Controls

Windshield wiper/washer control

Steering wheel adjustment

Power windows

Mirrors

Speed control

Locks and Security

Keys

Locks

Anti-theft system

101

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table of Contents

259

Maintenance and Specifications

Engine compartment

Engine oil

Battery

Engine coolant

Fuel information

Air filter(s)

261

264

269

271

277

292

294

Part numbers

Maintenance product specifications and capacities

Engine data

295

299

Accessories

302

304

307

Ford Extended Service Plan

Index

including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval

system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written

authorization from Ford Motor Company. Ford may change the contents without

notice and without incurring obligation.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Introduction

CONGRATULATIONS

Congratulations on acquiring your new Ford. Please take the time to get

well acquainted with your vehicle by reading this handbook. The more

you know and understand about your vehicle, the greater the safety and

pleasure you will derive from driving it.

For more information on Ford Motor Company and its products visit the

following website:

• In the United States: www.ford.com

• In Canada: www.ford.ca

• In Australia: www.ford.com.au

• In Mexico: www.ford.com.mx

Additional owner information is given in separate publications.

This Owner’s Guide describes every option and model variant available

and therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your

particular vehicle. Furthermore, due to printing cycles it may describe

options before they are generally available.

Remember to pass on this Owner’s Guide when reselling the vehicle. It is

an integral part of the vehicle.

WARNING: Fuel pump shut-off switch: In the event of an

accident the safety switch will automatically cut off the fuel

supply to the engine. The switch can also be activated through sudden

vibration (e.g. collision when parking). To reset the switch, refer to the

Fuel pump shut-off switch in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.

SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION

Warning symbols in this guide

How can you reduce the risk of personal injury to yourself or others? In

this guide, answers to such questions are contained in comments

highlighted by the warning triangle symbol. These comments should be

read and observed.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Introduction

Warning symbols on your vehicle

When you see this symbol, it is

imperative that you consult the

relevant section of this guide before

touching or attempting adjustment

of any kind.

Protecting the environment

We must all play our part in

protecting the environment. Correct

vehicle usage and the authorized

disposal of waste, cleaning and

lubrication materials are significant

steps towards this aim. Information in this respect is highlighted in this

guide with the tree symbol.

CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning

WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and

certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to

the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other

reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and

certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known

to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other

reproductive harm.

PERCHLORATE MATERIAL

Certain components of this vehicle such as airbag modules, seat belt

pretensioners, and button cell batteries may contain Perchlorate Material

– Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal.

See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

BREAKING-IN YOUR VEHICLE

Your vehicle does not need an extensive break-in. Try not to drive

continuously at the same speed for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of

new vehicle operation. Vary your speed frequently in order to give the

moving parts a chance to break in.

Drive your new vehicle at least 1,000 miles (1,600 km) before towing a

trailer. For more detailed information about towing a trailer, refer to

Trailer towing in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Introduction

Do not add friction modifier compounds or special break-in oils since

these additives may prevent piston ring seating. See Engine oil in the

Maintenance and Specifications chapter for more information on oil

usage.

SPECIAL NOTICES

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered by

your vehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty, refer to the Warranty

Guide/Customer Information Guide that is provided to you along with

your Owner’s Guide.

Special instructions

For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic

controls.

WARNING: Please read the section Airbag Supplemental

Restraint System (SRS) in the Seating and Safety Restraints

chapter. Failure to follow the specific warnings and instructions could

result in personal injury.

WARNING: Front seat mounted rear-facing child or infant seats

should NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger airbag.

DATA RECORDING

Service Data Recording

Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and

storing diagnostic information about your vehicle. This potentially

includes information about the performance or status of various systems

and modules in the vehicle, such as engine, throttle, steering or brake

systems. In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle, Ford

Motor Company, Ford of Canada, and service and repair facilities may

access or share among them vehicle diagnostic information received

through a direct connection to your vehicle when diagnosing or servicing

your vehicle. For U.S. only (if equipped), if you choose to use the SYNC௡

Vehicle Health Report, you consent that certain diagnostic information

may also be accessed electronically by Ford Motor Company and Ford

authorized service facilities, and that the diagnostic information may be

used for any purpose. See your SYNC௡ supplement for more information.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Introduction

Event Data Recording

Other modules in your vehicle — event data recorders — are

capable of collecting and storing data during a crash or near

crash event. The recorded information may assist in the

investigation of such an event. The modules may record

information about both the vehicle and the occupants, potentially

including information such as:

• how various systems in your vehicle were operating;

• whether or not the driver and passenger seatbelts were

buckled;

• how far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator

and/or the brake pedal;

• how fast the vehicle was traveling;

• where the driver was positioning the steering wheel; and

• longitude and latitude of vehicle at last location, using GPS

technology and advanced vehicle sensors.

To access this information, special equipment must be directly

connected to the recording modules. Ford Motor Company and

Ford of Canada do not access event data recorder information

without obtaining consent, unless pursuant to court order or

where required by law enforcement, other government authorities

or other third parties acting with lawful authority. Other parties

may seek to access the information independently of Ford Motor

Company and Ford of Canada. To the extent that any law

pertaining to Event Data Recording applies to SYNC௡ or its

features, please note the following: Once 911 Assist (if equipped)

is enabled (set ON), 911 Assist may, through any paired and

connected cell phone, disclose to emergency services that the

vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag

or, in certain vehicles, the activation of the fuel pump shut-off.

Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist may also be capable of

electronically or verbally disclosing to 911 operators the vehicle

location, and/or other details about the vehicle or crash to assist

911 operators to provide the most appropriate emergency

services. If you do not want to disclose this information, do not

activate the feature. See your SYNC௡ supplement for more

information. Additionally, when you connect to Traffic, Directions

and Information (if equipped, U.S. only), the service uses GPS

technology and advanced vehicle sensors to collect the vehicle’s

current location, travel direction, and speed (“vehicle travel

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Introduction

information”) only to help provide you with the directions, traffic

reports, or business searches you request. If you do not want

Ford or its vendors to receive this information, do not activate

the service. Ford Motor Company and the vendors it uses to

provide you with this information do not store your vehicle travel

information. For more information, see Traffic, Directions and

Information, Terms and Conditions. See your SYNC௡ supplement

for more information.

CELL PHONE USE

The use of Mobile Communications Equipment has become increasingly

important in the conduct of business and personal affairs. However,

drivers must not compromise their own or others’ safety when using

such equipment. Mobile Communications can enhance personal safety

and security when appropriately used, particularly in emergency

situations. Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications

equipment to avoid negating these benefits.

Mobile Communication Equipment includes, but is not limited to, cellular

phones, pagers, portable email devices, text messaging devices and

portable two-way radios.

WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle

control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that you

use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take

your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe

operation of your vehicle.

We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving

and that you comply with all applicable laws.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Introduction

EXPORT UNIQUE (NON–UNITED STATES/CANADA) VEHICLE

SPECIFIC INFORMATION

For your particular global region, your vehicle may be equipped with

features and options that are different from the features and options that

are described in this Owner’s Guide. A market unique supplement may

be supplied that complements this book. By referring to the market

unique supplement, if provided, you can properly identify those features,

recommendations and specifications that are unique to your vehicle. This

Owner’s Guide is written primarily for the U.S. and Canadian Markets.

Features or equipment listed as standard may be different on units built

for Export. Refer to this Owner’s Guide for all other required

information and warnings.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Introduction

These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.

Vehicle Symbol Glossary

Safety Alert

See Owner’s Guide

Airbag - Front

Fasten Safety Belt

Airbag - Side

Child Seat Lower

Anchor

Child Seat Tether

Anchor

Brake System

Anti-Lock Brake System

Parking Brake System

Brake Fluid -

Non-Petroleum Based

Parking Aid System

Speed Control

Stability Control System

Master Lighting Switch

Fog Lamps-Front

Hazard Warning Flasher

Fuse Compartment

Windshield Wash/Wipe

Fuel Pump Reset

Windshield

Rear Window

Defrost/Demist

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Introduction

Vehicle Symbol Glossary

Power Window Lockout

Interior Luggage

Power Windows

Front/Rear

Child Safety Door

Lock/Unlock

Compartment Release

Panic Alarm

Engine Oil

Engine Coolant

Temperature

Engine Coolant

Do Not Open When Hot

Battery

Avoid Smoking, Flames,

or Sparks

Battery Acid

Fan Warning

Explosive Gas

MAX

MIN

Maintain Correct Fluid

Level

Power Steering Fluid

Service Engine Soon

Engine Air Filter

Jack

Passenger Compartment

Air Filter

Low Tire Pressure

Warning

Check Fuel Cap

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Instrument Cluster

WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES

Base instrument cluster (V6 shown; V8 similar)

Optional instrument cluster (V6 shown; V8 similar)

Warning lights and gauges can alert you to a vehicle condition that may

become serious enough to cause extensive repairs. A warning light may

illuminate when a problem exists with one of your vehicle’s functions.

Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure the

bulbs work. If any light remains on after starting the vehicle, refer to the

respective system warning light for additional information.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Instrument Cluster

Service engine soon: The service

engine soon indicator light

illuminates when the ignition is first

turned to the on position to check

the bulb and to indicate whether the vehicle is ready for

Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing. Normally, the service engine soon

light will stay on until the engine is cranked, then turn itself off if no

malfunctions are present. However, if after 15 seconds the service engine

soon light blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not ready for

I/M testing. See the Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)

testing in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.

Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the On Board

Diagnostics System (OBD-II) has detected a malfunction. Refer to On

board diagnostics (OBD-II) in the Maintenance and Specifications

chapter. If the light is blinking, engine misfire is occurring which could

damage your catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid

heavy acceleration and deceleration) and contact your authorized dealer

as soon as possible.

WARNING: Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust

temperatures could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel

system, interior floor coverings or other vehicle components, possibly

causing a fire.

Check fuel fill inlet (if

equipped): Illuminates when the

fuel fill inlet may not be properly

closed. Continued driving with this

light on may cause the service

engine soon warning light to come

on. Refer to Easy Fuel™ “no cap” fuel system in the Maintenance and

Specifications chapter.

Brake system warning light: To

confirm the brake system warning

light is functional, it will

momentarily illuminate when the

ignition is turned to the on position

BRAKE

when the engine is not running, or in a position between on and start, or

by applying the parking brake when the ignition is turned to the on

position. If the brake system warning light does not illuminate at this

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Instrument Cluster

time, contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Illumination

after releasing the parking brake indicates low brake fluid level. Contact

your authorized dealer as soon as possible.

WARNING: Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning

light on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking

performance may occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle.

Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Driving extended

distances with the parking brake engaged can cause brake failure and

the risk of personal injury.

Anti-lock brake system (if

equipped): If the ABS light stays

ABS

illuminated or continues to flash, a

malfunction has been detected.

Contact your authorized dealer as

soon as possible. Normal braking is still functional unless the brake

warning light also is illuminated.

Airbag readiness: If this light fails

to illuminate when the ignition is

turned to on, continues to flash or

remains on, contact your authorized

dealer as soon as possible. A chime will sound if there is a malfunction in

the indicator light.

Safety belt: Reminds you to fasten

your safety belt. A Belt-Minder௡

chime will also sound to remind you

to fasten your safety belt. Refer to

the Seating and Safety Restraints

chapter to activate/deactivate the Belt-Minder௡ chime feature.

Charging system: Illuminates when

the battery is not charging properly.

If it stays on while the engine is

running, there may be a malfunction

with the charging system. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as

possible. This indicates a problem with the electrical system or a related

component.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Instrument Cluster

Engine oil pressure (if

equipped): Illuminates when the oil

pressure falls below the normal

range, refer to Engine oil in the

Maintenance and Specifications chapter.

Engine coolant temperature:

Illuminates when the engine coolant

temperature is high. Stop the

vehicle as soon as possible, switch off the engine and let cool. Refer to

Engine coolant in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.

WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the

engine is running or hot.

Low tire pressure warning:

Illuminates when your tire pressure

is low. If the light remains on at

start up or while driving, the tire

pressure should be checked. Refer

to Inflating your tires in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter. When

the ignition is first turned to on, the light will illuminate for three

seconds to ensure the bulb is working. If the light does not turn on,

contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. For more information

on this system, refer to Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) in

the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.

AdvanceTrac௡/Traction control

active: Flashes when the traction

control is active. If the light remains

on a malfunction has been detected;

contact your authorized dealer as

soon as possible. Refer to the Driving chapter for more information.

AdvanceTrac௡/Traction control

off light: Illuminates when the

traction control has been disabled

(by the driver or as a result of a

system failure). Refer to the

Driving chapter for more

information.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Instrument Cluster

O/D OFF (automatic

O/D

OFF

transmission): Illuminates when

the overdrive function of the

transmission has been turned off;

refer to the Driving chapter. If the light does not illuminate, contact

your authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Low fuel (if equipped):

Illuminates when the fuel level in

the fuel tank is at or near empty.

Refer to Fuel gauge in this chapter.

Speed control: Illuminates when

the speed control is engaged. Turns

off when the speed control system

is disengaged.

Door ajar (if equipped):

Illuminates when the ignition is in

the on position and any of the doors

or the hood/trunk are open.

Anti-theft system: Flashes when

the SecuriLock௡ passive anti-theft

system has been activated.

Electronic throttle control:

Illuminates when the engine has

defaulted to a “limp-home”

operation. Contact your authorized

dealer as soon as possible.

Turn signal: Illuminates when the

left or right turn signal or the

hazard lights are turned on. If the

indicators stay on or flash faster, check for a burned out bulb.

High beams: Illuminates when the

high beam headlamps are turned on.

Key-in-ignition warning chime: Sounds when the key is left in the

ignition in the off or accessory position and the driver’s door is opened.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Instrument Cluster

Headlamps on warning chime: Sounds when the headlamps or parking

lamps are on, the ignition is off (the key is not in the ignition) and the

driver’s door is opened.

GAUGES

Base instrument cluster gauges (V6 shown; V8 similar)

Optional instrument cluster gauges (V6 shown; V8 similar)

Refer to Message center in this chapter to select one of six preset colors

or three user definable colors (MyColor௡) for the nighttime gauge

backlighting.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Instrument Cluster

Speedometer: Indicates the current vehicle speed.

• V6 instrument cluster

• V8 instrument cluster

Engine coolant temperature

gauge: Indicates engine coolant

temperature. At normal operating

temperature, the needle will be in

the normal range (between “H” and

“C”). If it enters the red section, the

engine is overheating. Stop the

vehicle as soon as safely possible,

switch off the engine and let the engine cool.

WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the

engine is running or hot.

Odometer: Registers the total miles (kilometers) of the vehicle.

• Base instrument cluster:

• Optional instrument cluster:

Refer to Message center in this

chapter for how to switch the

display from Metric to English.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Instrument Cluster

Trip odometer: Registers the distance of individual journeys.

• Base instrument cluster:

Press the reset button to select Trip

A and Trip B. Press and hold the

reset button to reset the trip

odometer to zero.

• Optional instrument cluster:

Press and release the message

center INFO button until TRIP A

mode appears in the display. Press

the button again to select the TRIP

B feature. Press and hold the

RESET button to reset the trip odometer to zero.

Tachometer: Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute.

Driving with your tachometer pointer continuously at the top of the scale

may damage the engine.

• V6 instrument cluster

• V8 instrument cluster

Battery voltage gauge (if

equipped): Indicates the battery

voltage when the ignition is in the

on position. If the pointer moves

and stays outside the normal

operating range, contact your

authorized dealer as soon as

possible.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Instrument Cluster

Engine oil pressure gauge (if

equipped): Indicates engine oil

pressure. The needle should stay in

the normal operating range

(between “L” and “H”). If the needle

falls below the normal range, stop

the vehicle, turn off the engine and

check the engine oil level. Add oil if

needed. If the oil level is correct (and gauge reads no/low oil pressure),

shut down the engine immediately and contact your authorized dealer as

soon as possible.

Fuel gauge: Indicates

approximately how much fuel is left

in the fuel tank (when the ignition

is in the on position). The fuel

gauge may vary slightly when the

vehicle is in motion or on a grade.

The FUEL icon and arrow indicates

which side of the vehicle the fuel

filler door is located.

Refer to Filling the tank in the Maintenance and Specifications

chapter for more information.

MINI MESSAGE CENTER (IF EQUIPPED)

Selectable features

Press and release the RESET stem to scroll trough the message center

functions. Select or reset the function by holding the RESET stem for

more than two seconds.

This menu displays the following control displays:

• Odometer

• Trip Odometer A or B

• Autolamp (if equipped)

• Autolock/Autounlock (if equipped)

Odometer/Trip odometer

Refer to Gauges in this chapter.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Instrument Cluster

Autolamp delay (if equipped)

This feature keeps your headlights on for up to three minutes after the

ignition is switched off.

1. To disable/enable the autolamp

delay feature, select this function

using RESET stem.

2. Press and hold the RESET stem

for two seconds to select the new Autolamp delay values of 0, 10, 20, 30,

60, 90, 120 or 180 seconds.

Autolock/Autounlock (if equipped)

Autolock: This feature locks your doors when the vehicle is shifted out

of park.

Autounlock: This feature

automatically unlocks all vehicle

doors when the driver’s door is

opened within 10 minutes of the

ignition being turned off.

1. To disable/enable the

autolock/autounlock feature, select

this function using RESET stem.

2. Press and hold the RESET stem

for two seconds to turn it on or off

MESSAGE CENTER (IF EQUIPPED)

With the ignition in the on position,

the message center, located on your

instrument cluster, displays

important vehicle information

through a constant monitor of

vehicle systems. You may select

display features on the message center for a display of status. The

system will also notify you of potential vehicle problems with a display of

system warnings followed by a long indicator chime.

Note: Refer to the SETUP menu in this section to select the Single or

Dual mode display in your message center.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Instrument Cluster

Selectable features

Reset

Press this control to select and reset

functions shown in the INFO menu

and SETUP menu.

Setup menu

Press this control for the following

displays:

Note: The vehicle’s headlamps or

parklamps must be on to

perform/check light functions.

•System Check

•My Color 1, 2, 3

•Oil Life

•Units (English/Metric)

•Autolamp (if equipped)

•Autolock (if equipped)

•Autounlock (if equipped)

•Language

•Gauge Color

•Halo Light

•Halo Color

•Ambient Light (if equipped)

•Ambient Light Dim (if equipped)

•Ambient Color (if equipped)

System check

Selecting this function from the

SETUP menu causes the message

center to cycle through each of the

systems being monitored. For each

of the monitored systems, the

message center will indicate either

an OK message or a warning message for two seconds.

Pressing the RESET control cycles the message center through each of

the systems being monitored. Note: Some systems show a message only

if a condition is present.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Instrument Cluster

The sequence of the system check report and how it appears in the

message center is as follows:

1. OIL LIFE

2. CHARGING SYSTEM

3. ALL DOORS CLOSED

4. DRIVER DOOR

5. PASSENGER DOOR

6. TRUNK

7. SECURITY SYSTEM (if equipped)

8. BRAKE SYSTEM

9. FUEL LEVEL

Oil life

An oil change is required whenever indicated by the message center.

USE ONLY RECOMMENDED ENGINE OILS.

To reset the oil monitoring system to 100% after each oil change

[approximately 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or six months] perform the

following:

1. Press and release the SETUP

control to display “OIL LIFE =

XXX% HOLD RESET = NEW”.

2. Press and hold the RESET

control for two seconds and release.

Oil life is set to 100% and “OIL LIFE

SET TO 100%” is displayed.

3. While “OIL LIFE SET TO 100%”

is displayed, if a lower oil life start

value is desired, press and release the RESET control to reduce the start

value. Each press of the RESET control reduces the value by 10%.

Note: Oil life start value of 100% equals 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or six

months. For example, setting oil life start value to 60% sets the oil life

start value to 4,500 miles (7,200 km) and 108 days.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Instrument Cluster

Halo light

Turns the halo lighting around the gauges on or off.

1. To turn the halo lighting on or

off, select this function from the

SETUP MENU.

2. Press and hold RESET to turn

the feature on or off.

Ambient light

Turns the ambient lighting on or off. Ambient lighting provides accent

lighting in various locations such as footwell areas, cup holders and the

center console bin. The parklamps/headlamps must be on to use ambient

lighting.

1. To turn the ambient lighting on or

off, select this function from the

SETUP MENU.

2. Press and hold RESET to turn

the feature on or off.

Ambient light dim

Changes the intensity of the ambient lighting.

1. To change the intensity of the

ambient lighting, select this function

from the SETUP MENU.

2. Press RESET to choose: low,

medium, high or auto.

Gauge color, Ambient color, Halo color

Gauge color: The instrument cluster gauges are backlit with white

backlighting when the headlamps are off. When the headlamps are on,

you can select one of the preset colors for the nighttime gauge

backlighting or create up to three custom colors using the MyColor௡

feature.

Note: A gauge in a warning condition will be lit red when the headlamps

are on.

Ambient color: You can select one of the preset colors for ambient

lighting or create up to three custom colors using the MyColor௡ feature.

Halo color: You can select one of the preset colors for halo lighting or

create up to three custom colors using the MyColor௡ feature.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Instrument Cluster

Note: Headlamps or parklamps must be on to set up colors.

To choose colors for the gauges, halo color or ambient lighting do the

following:

1. Press SETUP to reach the GAUGE COLOR, AMBIENT COLOR, or

HALO COLOR menu.

2. Press RESET to scroll through the following color options:

• Ice Blue

• White

• Green

• Purple

• Blue

• Orange

• Red

• My color 1, 2, 3 (See Set my color following to save personalized color

combinations)

Set my color 1, 2, 3 (saving your own colors)

Apart from the preset colors, you can create your own color by adjusting

the levels of the three primary colors (Red, Green, and Blue) through

the MyColor௡ feature to achieve any of 125 different combinations. You

can save up to three custom colors in MyColor௡.

To enter the MyColor௡ adjust mode, do the following (vehicle must be

stationary):

1. Press and hold RESET for three

seconds at the MyColor 1, 2 or 3

menu option to reach the MyColor௡

adjust mode.

2. Press SETUP to scroll through

the Red (R), Green (G), Blue (B) and Exit options.

3. Press RESET to blend in more of the color being adjusted.

4. To save and exit, hold RESET for three seconds when prompted.

Pressing RESET for less than three seconds will cycle back through the

colors.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Instrument Cluster

Units (English/Metric)

1. Select this function from the

SETUP menu for the current units

to be displayed.

2. Press RESET to change from

English to Metric.

Autolamp

This feature keeps your headlights on for up to three minutes after the

ignition is switched off.

1. To disable/enable the autolamp

delay feature, select this function

from the SETUP control for the

current display mode.

2. Press RESET to select the new

Autolamp delay values of 0, 10, 20,

30, 60, 90, 120 or 180 seconds.

Autolock

This feature automatically locks all vehicle doors when the vehicle is

shifted into any gear, putting the vehicle in motion.

1. To disable/enable the autolock

feature, select this function from the

SETUP MENU.

2. Press RESET to turn autolock on

or off.

Autounlock (if equipped)

This feature automatically unlocks all vehicle doors when the driver’s

door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being turned off.

1. To disable/enable the autounlock

feature, select this function from the

SETUP MENU.

2. Press and hold RESET to turn

the autounlock on or off.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Instrument Cluster

Language

1. Select this function from the

SETUP menu for the current

language to be displayed.

2. Waiting four seconds or pressing

the RESET control cycles the

message center through each of the

language choices.

Selectable languages are English, Spanish, or French.

3. Press and hold the RESET

control for two seconds to set the

language choice.

Info menu

This control displays the following

control displays:

• Trip A or B

• Distance to Empty

• Average Fuel Economy

• Instantaneous Fuel Economy (MPG)

• Timer

• Blank Display

Odometer/Trip odometer

Refer to Gauges in this chapter.

Distance to empty (DTE)

Selecting this function from the

INFO menu estimates approximately

how far you can drive with the fuel

remaining in your tank under

normal driving conditions.

Remember to turn the ignition off

when refueling to allow this feature to correctly detect the added fuel.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Instrument Cluster

The DTE function will display LOW FUEL LEVEL when you have

approximately 50 miles (80 km), to empty. If you reset this warning

message, it will return at approximately 25 miles (40 km), 10 miles

(16 km) and 0 miles (0 km) miles to empty.

DTE is calculated using a running average fuel economy, which is based

on your recent driving history of 500 miles (800 km). This value is not

the same as the average fuel economy display. The running average fuel

economy is reinitialized to a factory default value if the battery is

disconnected.

Average fuel economy (AFE)

Select this function from the INFO

menu to display your average fuel

economy in miles/gallon or

liters/100 km.

If you calculate your average fuel

economy by dividing distance traveled by gallons of fuel used (liters of

fuel used by 100 kilometers traveled), your figure may be different than

displayed for the following reasons:

• Your vehicle was not perfectly level during fill-up

• Differences in the automatic shut-off points on the fuel pumps at

service stations

• Variations in top-off procedure from one fill-up to another

• Rounding of the displayed values to the nearest 0.1 gallon (liter)

1. Drive the vehicle at least 5 miles (8 km) with the speed control

system engaged to display a stabilized average.

2. Record the highway fuel economy for future reference.

It is important to press the RESET control (press and hold RESET for

two seconds in order to reset the function) after setting the speed

control to get accurate highway fuel economy readings.

For more information refer to Essentials of good fuel economy in the

Maintenance and Specifications chapter.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Instrument Cluster

Instantaneous fuel economy (IFE)

Select this function from the INFO

menu to display your instantaneous

fuel economy. This will display your

fuel economy as a bar graph ranging

from

excellent economy.

Your vehicle must be moving to calculate instantaneous fuel economy.

poor economy to

When your vehicle is not moving, this function shows

illuminated. Instantaneous fuel economy cannot be reset.

, one or no bars

Trip elapsed drive time

Select this function from the INFO

menu to display a timer.

To operate the trip elapsed drive

time perform the following:

1. Press and release RESET in order

to start the timer.

2. Press and release RESET to pause the timer.

3. Press and hold RESET for two seconds in order to reset the timer.

Blank display

Select this function from the INFO control to turn your message center

display off.

System warnings

System warnings alert you to possible problems or malfunctions in your

vehicle’s operating systems.

In the event of a multiple warning situation, the message center will

cycle the display to show all warnings by displaying each one for four

seconds.

The message center will display the last selected feature if there are no

more warning messages. This allows you to use the full functionality of

the message center after you acknowledge the warning by pressing

RESET and clearing the warning message.

Warning messages that have been reset are divided into three categories:

• They will not disappear until a condition is changed.

• They will reappear on the display 10 minutes from the reset.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Instrument Cluster

• They will not reappear until an ignition off-on cycle has been

completed.

This acts as a reminder that these warning conditions still exist within

the vehicle.

Warnings that can be reset:

DRIVER DOOR AJAR — Displayed when the driver’s door is not

completely closed.

PASSENGER DOOR AJAR — Displayed when the passenger side door

is not completely closed.

Warnings that return after 10 minutes:

OIL PRESSURE LOW — Displayed when the engine oil pressure is low.

If this warning message is displayed, check the level of the engine oil.

Refer to Engine oil in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for

information about adding engine oil. If the oil level is OK and this

warning persists, shut down the engine immediately and contact your

authorized dealer as soon as possible.

CHECK CHARGING SYSTEM — Displayed when the electrical system

is not maintaining proper voltage. If you are operating electrical

accessories when the engine is idling at a low speed, turn off as many of

the electrical loads as soon as possible. If the warning stays on or comes

on when the engine is operating at normal speeds, contact your

authorized dealer as soon as possible.

SERVICE ADVANCETRAC — Displayed when the AdvanceTrac௡

system has detected a condition that requires service.

CHECK FUEL FILL INLET — Displayed when the fuel fill inlet may

not be properly closed. Refer to Easy Fuel™ “no cap” fuel system in

the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.

FUEL LEVEL LOW — Displayed as an early reminder of a low fuel

condition.

Warnings that return after the ignition key is turned from off to

on:

CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM — Displayed when the braking system is not

operating properly. If the warning stays on or continues to come on,

contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.

LOW TIRE PRESSURE — Displayed when one or more tires on your

vehicle have low tire pressure. Refer to Inflating your tires in the Tires,

Wheels and Loading chapter.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Instrument Cluster

TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT — Displayed when the Tire

Pressure Monitoring System is malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or

continues to come on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as

possible.

TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR FAULT — Displayed when a tire pressure

sensor is malfunctioning, or your spare tire is in use. For more

information on how the system operates under these conditions, refer to

Understanding your tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) in the

Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter. If the warning stays on or

continues to come on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as

possible.

SECURITY EVENT OCCURRED (if equipped) — Displayed when

the active anti-theft system (if equipped) was activated since the prior

ignition cycle.

BRAKE FLUID LEVEL LOW — Indicates the brake fluid level is low

and the brake system should be inspected immediately. Refer to

Brake/clutch fluid in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Entertainment Systems

AUDIO SYSTEMS

AM/FM CD/MP3 satellite compatible sound system

WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle

control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that

drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their

focus off the road. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe

operation of their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not

essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so.

Accessory delay: Your vehicle is equipped with accessory delay. With

this feature, the radio and other electrical accessories may be used for

up to 10 minutes after the ignition is turned off or until either front door

is opened.

Note: Your vehicle is equipped with

a unique audio system. If your

display shows six small circles in the

display, your audio system is a CD6

system (six disc changer). If not,

your system is a single CD system.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Entertainment Systems

Setting the clock

To set the time, press CLOCK. The

display will read SET TIME. Use the

memory preset numbers (0–9) to

enter in the desired time–hours and minutes. The clock will then begin

from that time.

AM/FM Radio

/ VOL (Power/Volume): Press

to turn the radio on/off. Turn the

knob to increase/decrease volume.

If the volume is set above a certain

level and the ignition is turned off,

the volume will come back on at a nominal listening level when the

ignition switch is turned back on.

AM/FM: Press repeatedly to select

AM/FM1/FM2 frequency band.

TUNE: Turn the knob to go

up/down the frequency band in

individual increments.

DIRECT: Press DIRECT and then

select the desired radio frequency

(i.e. 93.9) using the memory preset

numbers (0–9).

SEEK: Press

SEEK

access the previous/next strong

radio station.

SCAN: Press for a brief sampling of

all strong radio stations.

MEMORY PRESETS (0–9): When

tuned to any station, press and hold

a preset button until sound returns

and PRESET # SAVED appears in the display. You can save up to 30

stations, 10 in AM, 10 in FM1 and FM2.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Entertainment Systems

Saving presets automatically: Autoset allows you to set the strongest

local radio stations without losing your original manually set preset

stations for AM/FM1/FM2.

To activate the autoset feature: Press MENU repeatedly until AUTO

PRESET ON/OFF appears in the display. Use

SEEK

to turn

AUTO PRESET to ON, and either wait five seconds for the search to

initiate or press OK to immediately initiate the search. If you press

another control within those five seconds, the search will not initiate.

The 10 strongest stations will be filled and the station stored in preset 1

will begin playing.

If there are fewer than 10 strong stations, the system will store the last

one in the remaining presets.

Note: In order to re-run the autoset features, you must first select

AUTO PRESET OFF and press OK. Then, select AUTO PRESET ON and

press OK.

RDS Radio

Available only in FM mode. This feature allows you to search

RDS-equipped stations for a certain category of music format: CLASSIC,

COUNTRY, JAZZ/RB, ROCK, etc.

To activate: Press MENU repeatedly until RDS (ON/OFF) appears in the

display. Use

SEEK

to switch RDS ON and OFF. When RDS is

OFF, you will not be able to search for RDS equipped stations or view

the station name or type.

CAT (Category) / FOLD

(Folder): This feature allows you

to select from various music

categories.

To change RDS categories: Press MENU repeatedly until RDS ON/OFF

appears in the display. Use

ON/OFF. Press CAT. PRESS UP OR DOWN TO CHANGE RDS

CATEGORY will appear in the display. Press SEEK to scroll

through all possible categories. When the desired category appears in the

display, press SEEK to find the next station playing that

SEEK

to toggle RDS between

selection or press SCAN for a brief sampling of all stations playing that

category of music.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Entertainment Systems

CD/MP3 Player

CD: Press to enter CD/MP3 mode. If

a disc is already loaded into the

system, CD/MP3 play will begin

where it ended last. If no CD is loaded, NO DISC will appear in the

display.

LOAD:

For a single CD system– This

control is not operational. To load a

CD, simply insert the disc, label side up, into the CD slot.

For a CD6 system– Press LOAD. When the display reads SELECT

SLOT, choose the desired slot number using memory presets 1–6. When

the display reads LOAD CD #, load the desired disc, label side up. If you

do not choose a slot within five seconds, the system will choose for you.

Once loaded, the first track will begin to play.

To auto load up to six discs– Press and hold LOAD until the display

reads AUTOLOAD #. Load the desired disc, label side up. The system

will prompt you to load discs for the remaining available slots. Insert the

discs, one at a time, label side up, when prompted. Once loaded, the disc

in preset #1 will begin to play.

Press the number preset buttons (1–6) to choose the disc you want to

play.

Play/Pause: Press to

play/pause a track when playing a

CD.

EJECT:

For a single CD system– press

EJECT to eject the CD.

For a CD6 system– press EJECT and select the desired CD slot by

pressing the corresponding memory preset number. The display will read

EJECTING #. When the system has ejected the CD, the display will read

REMOVE CD #. Remove the CD. If you do not remove the CD, the

system will reload the disc.

To auto eject all loaded discs– Press and hold EJECT. The system will

eject all discs and prompt you when to remove them.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Entertainment Systems

SEEK: Press

SEEK

access the previous/next track.

CAT (Category) / FOLD

(Folder):

In MP3 mode only– Press

CAT/FOLD and then

press

SEEK

to access the previous/next folder.

SCAN: Press for a brief sampling of

all tracks on the current disc or

MP3 folder.

DIRECT:

In CD mode– Press DIRECT. The

display will read DIRECT TRACK

MODE SELECT TRACK. Enter the desired track number using the

memory preset buttons (0–9). The system will then begin playing that

track.

In MP3 folder mode– Press DIRECT and the memory preset buttons

(0–9) of the desired folder. The system will advance to that specific

folder.

TEXT:

In MP3 mode only– Press TEXT

repeatedly to view Album (AL),

Folder (FL), Song (SO) and Artist (AR) in the display, if available.

In TEXT MODE: Sometimes the display requires additional text to be

displayed. When the < / > indicator is active, press TEXT and then

press

COMPRESSION: Press MENU repeatedly until COMPRESSION ON/OFF

appears in the display. Use SEEK to switch between ON/OFF.

SEEK

to view the additional display text.

When COMPRESSION is ON, the system will bring the soft and loud CD

passages together for a more consistent listening level.

SHUFFLE: Press MENU repeatedly until SHUFFLE ON/OFF appears in

the display. Use

SEEK

to switch between ON/OFF. If you wish to

engage shuffle mode right away, press

SEEK to begin random

play. Otherwise, random play will begin when the current track is

finished playing. The system will only shuffle the disc currently playing.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Entertainment Systems

Satellite Radio (if equipped)

Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS௡ radio

subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.

SIRIUS: Press repeatedly to access

satellite radio mode, if equipped.

Press repeatedly to cycle through

SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3 modes.

TUNE: Turn to go to the next /

previous available SIRIUS௡ satellite

station.

DIRECT: Press DIRECT then enter

the desired channel (i.e. 002) using

the memory preset buttons (0–9). If

you only enter one digit, press OK

and the system will go to that satellite channel. If you enter three digits,

the system will automatically go to that channel, if available. You may

cancel your entry by pressing DIRECT. If an invalid station number is

entered, INVALID CHANNEL will appear in the display and the system

will continue playing the current station.

SEEK: Press

SEEK

to seek

to the previous/next channel. If a

specific category is selected, (Jazz,

Rock, News, etc.),

press

SEEK

to seek to the previous/next channel in the selected

category. Press and hold

previous/next channels.

SEEK

to fast seek through the

SCAN: Press SCAN for a brief

sampling of all available SIRIUS௡

satellite channels. If a specific

category is selected, (Jazz, Rock, News, etc.) press SCAN for a brief

sampling of all available SIRIUS௡ satellite channels within the selected

category.

MEMORY PRESETS (0–9): There

are 30 available presets, 10 each for

SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3. To save

satellite channels in your memory presets, tune to the desired channel

then press and hold a memory preset number (0–9) until sound returns.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Entertainment Systems

TEXT: Press and release to display

the artist and song title. While in

TEXT MODE, press again to scroll

through the Artist (AR), Song (SO), Channel (CH) and Category (CA).

In TEXT MODE: Sometimes the display requires additional text to be

displayed. When the < / > indicator is active, press TEXT and then

press

SEEK

to view the additional display text.

CAT (Category) / FOLD

(Folder): Press to switch between

turning the most recently selected

satellite radio category on or off. The category icon (CAT) will illuminate

in the display when a specific category is selected (the icon will not

illuminate during CATEGORY ALL). If no category has ever been

selected, NO CATEGORY SELECTED will display.

Note: Separate categories can be set for SAT1, SAT2 or SAT3.

Refer to Satellite radio menu for further information on selecting a

satellite radio category.

SATELLITE RADIO MENU: Press

MENU when satellite radio mode is

active to access. Press OK to enter

into the satellite radio menu. Press

following options:

SEEK

to cycle through the

• CATEGORY MENU- Press OK to enter category mode.

Press SEEK to scroll through the list of available SIRIUS௡

channel Categories (Pop, Rock, News, etc.) Press OK when the

desired category appears in the display. After a category is selected,

press

SEEK

to search for that specific category of channels

only (i.e. ROCK). You may also select CATEGORY ALL to seek all

available SIRIUS௡ categories and channels. Press OK to close and

return to the main menu.

• SONG SEEK MENU- Press OK to enter song seek menu.

Press

SEEK

to scroll through the following options:

a. SAVE THIS SONG: Press OK to save the currently playing song’s

title in the system’s memory. (If you try to save something other than

a song, CANT SAVE will appear in the display.) When the chosen song

is playing on any satellite radio channel, the system will alert you with

an audible prompt. Press OK while SONG ALERT is in the display and

the system will take you to the channel playing the desired song. You

can save up to 20 song titles. If you attempt to save more than 20

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Entertainment Systems

titles, the display will read REPLACE SONG? Press OK to access the

saved titles and press

SEEK

to cycle through the saved titles.

When the song title appears in the display that you would like to

replace, press OK. SONG REPLACED will appear in the display.

b. DELETE A SONG: Press OK to delete a song from the system’s

memory. Press

SEEK

to cycle through the saved songs. When

the song appears in the display that you would like to delete, press

OK. The song will appear in the display for confirmation. Press OK

again and the display will read SONG DELETED. If you do not want

to delete the currently listed song, press

RETURN or CANCEL.

SEEK

to select either

Note: If there are no songs presently saved, the display will read NO

SONGS.

c. DELETE ALL SONGS: Press OK to delete all song’s from the

system’s memory. The display will read ARE YOU SURE? Press OK to

confirm deletion of all saved songs and the display will read ALL

DELETED.

Note: If there are no songs presently saved, the display will read NO

SONGS.

d. DISABLE ALERTS/ENABLE ALERTS: Press OK to

enable/disable the satellite alert status which alerts you when your

selected songs are playing on a satellite radio channel. (The system

default is disabled.) SONG ALERTS ENABLED/DISABLED will appear

in the display. The menu listing will display the opposite state. For

example, if you have chosen to enable the song alerts, the menu

listing will read DISABLE as the alerts are currently on, so your other

option is to turn them off.

• CHANNEL LOCKOUT MENU- Press OK to enter the Channel

Lockout menu. Press the

options:

SEEK

to scroll through the following

a. LOCK/UNLOCK THIS CHANNEL: Press OK when

LOCK/UNLOCK THIS CHANNEL is displayed and the display will read

ENTER PIN. Enter your four-digit PIN number (initial PIN is 1234)

and the system will lock/unlock the channel and CHANNEL LOCKED

or UNLOCKED will be displayed.

Note: you must be tuned to the specific channel you want to

lock/unlock when using this feature.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Entertainment Systems

b. CHANGE PIN: Press OK when CHANGE PIN is displayed. The

display will read ENTER OLD PIN. Enter your current (old) PIN

number and when the system accepts your entry it will display

ENTER NEW PIN. Enter your new four-digit PIN and the system will

save the new PIN and PIN SAVED will display.

c. UNLOCK ALL CHANNELS: Press OK when UNLOCK ALL

CHANNELS is displayed and the display will read ENTER PIN. Enter

your four-digit PIN and the system will unlock all channels and the

display will read CHANNEL UNLOCKED.

d. RESET PIN: Press OK when RESET PIN is displayed. The display

will read ARE YOUR SURE. Press OK again to automatically reset the

PIN to its initial password setting (1234). PIN RESET TO DEFAULT

PIN will be displayed.

e. RETURN: Press OK when RETURN is displayed and the system

will exit back to the satellite radio menu.

Sound Adjustments

Press SOUND repeatedly to cycle

through the following features:

BASS: Press

SEEK

adjust the level of bass.

TREBLE: Press

SEEK

to adjust the level of treble.

BALANCE: Press

to adjust the audio between the left

(L) and right (R) speakers.

FADE: Press SEEK

and front (F) speakers.

to adjust the audio between the back (B)

SPEED COMPENSATED VOLUME: With this feature on, radio volume

automatically gets louder with increasing vehicle speed to compensate

for road and wind noise.

The default setting is off.

Use

SEEK

to adjust between SPEED OFF and levels 1–7:

Increasing the level from 1 (lowest setting) to 7 (highest setting) allows

the radio volume to automatically change slightly with vehicle speed to

compensate for road and wind noise.

Recommended level is 1–3; SPEED OFF turns the feature off and level 7

is the maximum setting.

DSP MODE (if equipped): Press

SEEK

to choose between

STEREO SURROUND mode and STEREO mode.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Entertainment Systems

Extra Features

AUX: Press repeatedly to cycle

through LINE (auxiliary audio

mode) and SYNC௡ (if equipped).

For auxiliary jack location and further information on auxiliary audio

mode, refer to Auxiliary input jack later in this chapter.

If your vehicle is equipped with SYNC௡, please refer to the SYNC௡

information included with your vehicle for further information.

Play/Pause: Press this

control to play or pause the current

CD.

OK: Your vehicle may be equipped

with special phone and media

features which will require you to confirm commands by pressing OK.

For further information, refer to the SYNC௡ information included with

your vehicle.

PHONE: If your vehicle is equipped with SYNC௡, press to access SYNC

PHONE features. For further information, please refer to the SYNC௡

information included with your vehicle.

If your vehicle is not equipped with SYNC௡, the display will read NO

PHONE.

Auxiliary input jack (Line in)

WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle

control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that

drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their

focus off the road. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe

operation of their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not

essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Entertainment Systems

Your vehicle is equipped with an

auxiliary input jack (AIJ) located in

the center console. The auxiliary

input jack provides a way to connect

your portable music player to the

in-vehicle audio system. This allows

the audio from a portable music

player to be played through the

vehicle speakers with high fidelity.

To achieve optimal performance,

please observe the following

instructions when attaching your

portable music device to the audio

system.

If your vehicle is equipped with a

navigation system, refer to

Auxiliary input jack section in the

Audio features chapter of your

Navigation System supplement.

Required equipment:

1. Any portable music player designed to be used with headphones

2. An audio extension cable with stereo male 1/8 in. (3.5 mm)

connectors at each end

To play your portable music player using the auxiliary input jack:

1. Begin with the vehicle parked and the radio turned off.

2. Ensure that the battery in your portable music player is new or fully

charged and that the device is turned off.

3. Attach one end of the audio extension cable to the headphone output

of your player and the other end of the audio extension cable to the AIJ

in your vehicle.

4. Turn the radio on, using either a tuned FM station or a CD loaded into

the system. Adjust the volume to a comfortable listening level.

5. Turn the portable music player on and adjust the volume to 1/2 the

volume.

6. Press AUX on the vehicle radio repeatedly until LINE, LINE IN or

SYNC LINE IN appears in the display.

You should hear audio from your portable music player although it may

be low.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Entertainment Systems

7. Adjust the sound on your portable music player until it reaches the

level of the FM station or CD by switching back and forth between the

AUX and FM or CD controls.

Troubleshooting:

1. Do not connect the audio input jack to a line level output. Line level

outputs are intended for connection to a home stereo and are not

compatible with the AIJ. The AIJ will only work correctly with devices

that have a headphone output with a volume control.

2. Do not set the portable music player’s volume level higher than is

necessary to match the volume of the CD or FM radio in your audio

system as this will cause distortion and will reduce sound quality. Many

portable music players have different output levels, so not all players

should be set at the same levels. Some players will sound best at full

volume and others will need to be set at a lower volume.

3. If the music sounds distorted at lower listening levels, turn the

portable music player volume down. If the problems persists, replace or

recharge the batteries in the portable music player.

4. The portable music player must be controlled in the same manner

when it is used with headphones as the AIJ does not provide control

(play, pause, etc.) over the attached portable music player.

5. For safety reasons, connecting or adjusting the settings on your

portable music player should not be attempted while the vehicle is

moving. Also, the portable music player should be stored in a secure

location, such as the center console or the glove box, when the vehicle is

in motion. The audio extension cable must be long enough to allow the

portable music player to be safely stored while the vehicle is in motion.

USB port (if equipped)

WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle

control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that

drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their

focus off the road. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe

operation of their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not

essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Entertainment Systems

Your vehicle may be equipped with a

USB port inside your center console.

This feature allows you to plug in

media playing devices, memory

LINE IN

sticks, and also to charge devices if

they support this feature. For

further information on this feature,

refer to Accessing and using your

USB port in the SYNC௡ supplement

or Navigation System supplement.

GENERAL AUDIO INFORMATION

Radio frequencies:

AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications

Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications

Commission (CRTC). Those frequencies are:

AM: 530, 540–1700, 1710 kHz

FM: 87.7, 87.9–107.7, 107.9 MHz

Radio reception factors:

There are three factors that can affect radio reception:

• Distance/strength: The further you travel from an FM station, the

weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.

• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, power lines, electric fences,

traffic lights and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.

• Station overload: When you pass a broadcast tower, a stronger signal

may overtake a weaker one and play while the weak station frequency

is displayed.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Entertainment Systems

CD/CD player care

Do:

• Handle discs by their edges only.

(Never touch the playing

surface).

• Inspect discs before playing.

• Clean only with an approved CD

cleaner.

• Wipe discs from the center out.

Don’t:

• Expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods

of time.

• Clean using a circular motion.

CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in

(12 cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical

incompatibility, certain recordable and re-recordable compact

discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD players.

Do not use any irregular shaped

CDs or discs with a scratch

protection film attached.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Entertainment Systems

CDs with homemade paper

(adhesive) labels should not be

inserted into the CD player as

the label may peel and cause the

CD to become jammed. It is

recommended that homemade

CDs be identified with

permanent felt tip marker rather

than adhesive labels. Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please

contact your authorized dealer for further information.

Audio system warranty and service

Refer to the Warranty Guide/Customer Information Guide for audio

system warranty information. If service is necessary, see your dealer or

qualified technician.

MP3 track and folder structure

Your MP3 system recognizes MP3 individual tracks and folder structure

as follows:

• There are two different modes for MP3 disc playback: MP3 track mode

(system default) and MP3 folder mode. For more information on track

and folder mode, refer to Sample MP3 structure in the following

section.

• MP3 track mode ignores any folder structure on the MP3 disc. The

player numbers each MP3 track on the disc (noted by the .mp3 file

extension) from T001 to a maximum of T255.

Note: The maximum number of playable MP3 files may be less

depending on the structure of the CD and exact model of radio

present.

• MP3 folder mode represents a folder structure consisting of one level

of folders. The CD player numbers all MP3 tracks on the disc (noted

by the .mp3 file extension) and all folders containing MP3 files, from

F001 (folder) T001 (track) to F253 T255.

• Creating discs with only one level of folders will help with navigation

through the disc files.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Entertainment Systems

Sample MP3 structure

If you are burning your own MP3

discs, it is important to understand

how the system will read the

structures you create. While various

files may be present, (files with

extensions other than mp3), only

files with the .mp3 extension will be

played. Other files will be ignored

by the system. This enables you to

use the same MP3 disc for a variety

of tasks on your work computer,

home computer and your in vehicle

system.

.mp3

.doc

.ppt

.xls

In track mode, the system will display and play the structure as if it were

only one level deep (all .mp3 files will be played, regardless of being in a

specific folder). In folder mode, the system will only play the .mp3 files

in the current folder.

Satellite radio information (if equipped)

Satellite radio channels: SIRIUS௡ broadcasts a variety of music, news,

sports, weather, traffic and entertainment satellite radio channels. For

more information and a complete list of SIRIUS௡ satellite radio channels,

visit www.sirius.com in the United States, www.sirius-canada.ca in

Canada, or call SIRIUS௡ at 1–888–539–7474.

Satellite radio reception factors: To receive the satellite signal, your

vehicle has been equipped with a satellite radio antenna. Like AM/FM,

there are several factors that can affect satellite radio reception

performance:

• Antenna Obstructions: For optimal reception performance, keep the

antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and any

material as far away from the antenna as possible.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Entertainment Systems

• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway

overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can

interfere with your reception.

• Station overload: When you pass a ground based broadcast repeating

tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and result in an

audio mute.

Unlike AM/FM audible static, you will hear an audio mute when there is

a satellite radio signal interference. Your radio display may display NO

SIGNAL to indicate the interference.

SIRIUS௡ satellite radio service: SIRIUS௡ satellite radio is a

subscription based satellite radio service that broadcasts music, sports,

news and entertainment programming. A service fee is required in order

to receive SIRIUS௡ service. Vehicles that are equipped with a factory

installed SIRIUS௡ satellite radio system include:

• Hardware and limited subscription term, which begins on the date of

sale or lease of the vehicle.

For information on extended subscription terms, the online media player

and other SIRIUS௡ features, please contact SIRIUS௡ at 1–888–539–7474.

Note: SIRIUS௡ reserves the unrestricted right to change, rearrange, add

or delete programming including canceling, moving or adding particular

channels, and its prices, at any time, with or without notice to you. Ford

Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming

changes.

Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number (ESN): This 12-digit

Satellite Serial Number is needed to activate, modify or track your

satellite radio account. You will need this number when communicating

with SIRIUS௡. While in satellite radio mode, you can view this number on

the radio display by pressing AUX and the preset 1 control

simultaneously.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Entertainment Systems

Radio Display

Condition

Action Required

ACQUIRING

Radio requires more

than two seconds to

produce audio for the

selected channel.

No action required. This

message should disappear

shortly.

SAT FAULT

Internal module or

If this message does not

system failure present. clear within a short period

of time, or with an ignition

key cycle, your receiver may

have a fault. See your

authorized dealer for

service.

INVALID CHNL

Channel no longer

available.

This previously available

channel is no longer

available. Tune to another

channel. If the channel was

one of your presets, you

may choose another channel

for that preset button.

Contact SIRIUS௡ at

UNSUBSCRIBED

NO TEXT

Subscription not

available for this

channel.

1–888–539–7474 to

subscribe to the channel, or

tune to another channel.

Artist information not

available at this time on this

channel. The system is

working properly.

Artist information not

available.

NO TEXT

Song title information

not available.

Song title information not

available at this time on this

channel. The system is

working properly.

NO TEXT

Category information

not available.

Category information not

available at this time on this

channel. The system is

working properly.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Entertainment Systems

Radio Display

Condition

Action Required

NO SIGNAL

Loss of signal from

You are in a location that is

the SIRIUS௡ satellite blocking the SIRIUS௡ signal

or SIRIUS௡ tower to (i.e., tunnel, under an

the vehicle antenna. overpass, dense foliage, etc).

The system is working

properly. When you move

into an open area, the signal

should return.

UPDATING

Update of channel

programming in

progress.

No action required. The

process could take up to

three minutes.

CALL SIRIUS௡

1–888–539–7474

Satellite service has

been deactivated by

SIRIUS௡ satellite

radio.

Call SIRIUS௡ at

1–888–539–7474 to

re-activate or resolve

subscription issues.

NAVIGATION SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

Your vehicle may be equipped with a navigation system. Refer to the

Navigation System supplement for further information.

SYNCா (IF EQUIPPED)

Your vehicle may be equipped with SYNC௡, a hands-free communications

and entertainment system with special phone and media features. For

more information, please refer to the SYNC௡ supplement or to the

SYNC௡ section in the Navigation System supplement (if equipped).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Climate Controls

MANUAL HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

(IF EQUIPPED)

Temperature conversion: To switch between Fahrenheit and Celsius,

refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter.

Defrost: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster

vents and de-mister vents. Can be used to clear the windshield of fog

and thin ice. The system will automatically provide outside air to reduce

window fogging. Press this button again to return to the previous air flow

selection.

Rear defroster: Press to activate/deactivate the rear window

defroster. Refer to Rear window defroster later in this chapter for more

information.

Multifunction control: Press repeatedly to cycle through the

settings to choose:

•

: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents, de-mister

vents and floor vents. The system will automatically provide outside

air to reduce window fogging.

•

: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents.

: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents, floor vents,

and de-mister vents.

•

: Distributes air through the floor vents.

4. A/C: Press to activate/deactivate air conditioning. Use with

recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency. A/C

engages automatically in MAX A/C,

(floor/defrost).

(defrost) and

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Climate Controls

Recirculated air: Press to activate/deactivate air recirculation in

the vehicle. Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time needed to

cool down the interior of the vehicle and may also help reduce undesired

odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle. Recirculated air engages

automatically when MAX A/C is selected or can be engaged manually in

any airflow mode except

(defrost). When the ignition switch is

turned off and back on, the climate system will return to the recirculated

air mode only if the A/C button LED is illuminated and the air

distribution selection is either

(panel) or

(panel/floor).

6. MAX A/C: Distributes recirculated air through the instrument panel

vents to cool the vehicle. This re-cooling of the interior air is more

economical and efficient. Recirculated air may also help reduce

undesirable odors from entering the vehicle. Press the MAX A/C button

again for normal A/C operation.

Passenger heated seat control (if equipped): Press to control

the passenger heated seat. Refer to Heated seats in the Seating and

Safety Restraints chapter for more information.

8. Temperature control: Controls the temperature of the airflow in the

vehicle.

Fan speed adjustment: Turn to select the desired fan speed.

10.

Driver heated seat control (if equipped): Press to control the

driver seat. Refer to Heated seats in the Seating and Safety Restraints

chapter for more information.

11.

Power: Press to activate/deactivate the climate control system.

When the system is off, outside air is prevented from entering the

vehicle.

Operating tips

• To reduce fog build-up on the windshield during humid weather,

select

(defrost). Temperature and/or fan speed can also be

increased to improve clearing.

• To reduce humidity build-up inside the vehicle, do not drive with the

system off or with recirculated air engaged.

• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the

airflow to the back seats.

• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of

the windshield.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Climate Controls

• To improve the A/C cool down, drive with the windows slightly open

for 2-3 minutes after start up or until the vehicle has been “aired out.”

During extreme high ambient temperatures when idling stationary for

extended periods of time in gear, it is recommended to run the A/C in

the MAX A/C mode, adjust the blower fan speed to the lowest setting

and put the vehicle’s transmission into the P (Park) position (automatic

transmission only) to continue to receive cool air from your A/C system.

For maximum cooling performance in MAX A/C mode:

1. Move temperature control to the coolest setting.

2. Set the fan to the highest speed initially, then adjust to maintain

comfort.

For maximum cooling performance in panel or panel/floor modes:

1. Move temperature control to the coolest setting.

2. Select A/C and

(recirculated air) to provide colder airflow.

3. Set the fan to the highest speed initially, then adjust to maintain

comfort.

To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:

1. Select

2. Select A/C.

3. Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort.

4. Set the fan speed to the highest setting.

5. Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows.

6. To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the

vents located in the middle of the instrument panel.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Climate Controls

DUAL ZONE AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL

(NAVIGATION BASED – IF EQUIPPED)

Temperature conversion: To switch between Fahrenheit and Celsius,

refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter.

1. CLIMATE: Press to control the climate control system through the

touch display screen. See Touchscreen functions later in this section.

Rear defroster (if equipped): Press to activate/deactivate the

rear window defroster. Refer to Rear window defroster later in this

chapter for more information. If your vehicle is equipped with both rear

defroster and heated mirrors, the same button will activate both.

3. A/C: Press to activate/deactivate air conditioning. Use with

recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency. A/C

engages automatically in Max A/C,

and (floor/defrost).

(defrost)

4. Passenger temperature: Press to activate separate passenger

temperature control to increase/decrease the air temperature on the

passenger side of the vehicle.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Climate Controls

Passenger heated seat (if equipped): Press to control the

passenger heated seat. Refer to Heated seats in the Seating and Safety

Restraints chapter for more information.

Recirculated air: Press to activate/deactivate air recirculation in

the vehicle. Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time needed to

cool down the interior of the vehicle when used with A/C and may also

help reduce undesired odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle.

Recirculated air engages automatically when Max A/C is selected or can

be engaged manually in any airflow mode except

(defrost).

Recirculation may turn off automatically in all airflow selections except

Max A/C.

7. –

+ Fan speed control: Press to decrease/increase the fan speed.

8. AUTO: Press to engage full automatic operation. Select the desired

temperature using the temperature control. The system will

automatically determine fan speed, airflow location, A/C on or off, and

outside or recirculated air, to heat or cool the vehicle to reach the

desired temperature.

9. Driver temperature: Press to increase/decrease the air temperature

for the driver side of the vehicle. This control also adjusts the passenger

side temperature when dual zone operation is disengaged.

10.

Driver heated seat (if equipped): Press to control the driver

heated seat. Refer to Heated seats in the Seating and Safety Restraints

chapter for more information.

11.

Power: Press to activate/deactivate the climate control system.

When the system is off, outside air is prevented from entering the

vehicle. The climate status in the touchscreen will also be turned off.

When the power is turned back on, the system defaults to full automatic

control.

12.

Defrost: Distributes outside air through the windshield

defroster vents and de-mister vents. Can be used to clear the windshield

of fog and thin ice. The system will automatically provide outside air to

reduce window fogging. Press this button again to return to the previous

air flow selection. To return to full automatic control, press AUTO.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Climate Controls

TOUCHSCREEN FUNCTIONS

Temperature conversion: To switch between Fahrenheit and Celsius,

refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter.

Temperature: Press the up and down arrows on the left side of the

screen to increase/decrease the airflow temperature for the driver side of

the vehicle. This control also adjusts the passenger side temperature

when dual zone operation is disengaged. Press the up and down arrows

on the right side of the screen to increase/decrease the airflow

temperature for the passenger side of the vehicle.

•

: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents.

: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents, floor vents,

and de-mister vents.

•

: Distributes air through the floor vents.

: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents, de-mister

vents, and floor vents. The system will automatically provide outside

air to reduce window fogging.

To return to full automatic control, press AUTO on the main bezel.

Fan Speed: Press to decrease/increase the fan speed.

Dual: Press to activate/deactivate separate driver and passenger

temperature controls.

Max A/C: Distributes recirculated air through the instrument panel

vents to cool the vehicle. This re-cooling of the interior air is more

economical and efficient. Recirculated air may also help reduce

undesirable odors from entering the vehicle. Press Max A/C again for

normal operation.

VOICE COMMANDS IN CLIMATE MODE

Please refer to the Voice commands in climate mode section of the

Navigation Supplement for more information on using voice commands

with the climate control system.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Climate Controls

Operating tips

• To reduce fog build-up on the windshield during humid weather,

select (defrost). Temperature and/or fan speed can also be

increased to improve clearing.

• To reduce humidity build-up inside the vehicle: do not drive with the

system off or with

(recirculated air) engaged.

• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the

airflow to the back seats.

• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of

the windshield.

• To improve the A/C cool down, drive with the windows slightly open

for 2-3 minutes after start up or until the vehicle has been “aired out.”

• If you are driving during extreme high ambient temperatures and

idling for extended periods of time in gear, it is recommended to run

the A/C in the MAX A/C mode, adjust the blower fan speed to the

lowest setting and put the vehicle’s transmission in P (Park) to

continue to receive cool air from your A/C system.

For maximum cooling performance MAX A/C in AUTO:

1. Press AUTO control.

2. Set to desired temperature.

For maximum cooling performance MAX A/C in manual override

control

1. Choose

(panel), A/C, and MAX A/C controls.

2. Set the temperature to 60°F (16°C).

3. Set the fan to the highest blower setting.

To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:

1. Select

2. Select A/C.

3. Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort.

4. Set the fan speed to the highest setting.

5. Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows.

To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the vents

located in the middle of the instrument panel.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Climate Controls

REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER

Press the control to clear the rear window of thin ice and fog. The LED

will illuminate.

The rear window defroster turns off automatically after 15 minutes, or

when the ignition is turned off. To manually turn off the defroster before

15 minutes have passed, press the control again.

The vehicle must be running to use this feature.

Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean the inside

of the rear window or to remove decals from the inside of the

rear window. This may cause damage to the heated grid lines and

will not be covered by your warranty.

CABIN AIR FILTER

Your vehicle is equipped with a cabin air filter, which is located just in

front of the windshield under the cowl grille on the passenger side of the

vehicle.

The particulate air filtration system is designed to reduce the

concentration of airborne particles such as dust, spores and pollen in the

air being supplied to the interior of the vehicle. The particulate filtration

system gives the following benefits to customers:

• Improves the customer’s driving comfort by reducing particle

concentration

• Improves the interior compartment cleanliness

• Protects the climate control components from particle deposits

For more information regarding the interval at which you should replace

the cabin air filter, refer to your scheduled maintenance information.

For additional cabin air filter information, or to replace the filter, see an

authorized dealer.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Lights

HEADLAMP CONTROL

Turns the lamps off.

Turns on the parking lamps,

instrument panel lamps, license

plate lamps and tail lamps.

Turns the low beam headlamps

on.

Automatic instrumentation illumination

When the headlamps or parking lamps are switched on, a light sensor in

your vehicle monitors the outside lighting conditions and automatically

sets the instrument panel illumination to one of the following modes:

• If the headlamps and parking lamps are off, the vehicle will be in

daytime illumination mode.

• If the headlamps or parking lamps are on and daylight is detected, the

vehicle will be in daytime illumination mode.

• If the headlamps or parking lamps are on and nighttime conditions are

detected, the vehicle will be in nighttime illumination mode.

Note: The panel dimmer control works only in nighttime illumination

mode. It has no effect in daytime illumination mode. Also, selectable

features such as gauge color and halo color will not be available in

daytime illumination mode.

Autolamp control (if equipped)

The autolamp system provides light

sensitive automatic on-off control of

the exterior lights normally

controlled by the headlamp control.

• To turn autolamps on, rotate the

control to

• To turn autolamps off, rotate the

control from the autolamp

position.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Lights

The autolamp system also keeps the lights on for a predetermined

amount of time after the ignition switch is turned to off. You can change

the amount of time the lamps stay on by using the programming

procedure that follows:

Note: If the vehicle is equipped with autolamps, it will have the

headlamps on with windshield wipers feature. If the windshield

wipers are turned on, the exterior lamps will turn on with the headlamp

control in the autolamp position.

Autolamps - programmable exit delay

Programmable exit delay allows the length of the autolamp exit delay to

be changed.

To program the auto lamp exit time delay:

1. Start with the ignition in the off position and the headlamp control in

the autolamp position.

2. Turn the headlamp control to off.

3. Turn the ignition switch to on and then back to off.

4. Turn the headlamp control to the autolamp position. The headlamps

will turn on.

5. Wait the desired amount of time for the exit delay you want (up to

three minutes), then turn the headlamps off.

Fog lamp control (if equipped)

The fog lamps can be turned on

when the ignition is in the on

position, the headlamp control is in

the

position and the

high beams are not on.

Pull the headlamp control towards

you to turn on the fog lamps. The

indicator light under the fog lamp

symbol will illuminate.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Lights

High beams

Push the lever toward the

instrument panel to activate. Pull

the lever toward you to deactivate.

Flash-to-pass

Pull toward you, to the first detent,

to activate and release to deactivate.

Note: Vehicles equipped with HID

headlamps will hear an audible click

when activating this feature.

Daytime running lamps (DRL) (if equipped)

Turns the headlamps on with a reduced output (vehicles equipped with

halogen headlamps) or turns the front fog lamps on (vehicles equipped

with HID headlamps).

To activate:

• the ignition must be in the on position,

• the headlamp control is in the off or parking lamp position and

• the parking brake must be disengaged.

WARNING: Always remember to turn on your headlamps at

dusk or during inclement weather. The Daytime Running Lamp

(DRL) system does not activate the tail lamps and generally may not

provide adequate lighting during these conditions. Failure to activate

your headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Lights

PANEL DIMMER CONTROL

Use to adjust the brightness of the

instrument panel and all applicable

switches in the vehicle during

headlamp and parking lamp

operation.

Move the control to the full upright

position, past detent, to turn on the

interior lamps. Move the control

down, past detent, to turn off the

interior lights. Move the control to

the full downward position, to dim

the interior lights to their minimum. The instrument panel/switch lighting

remains lit.

Note: If the battery is disconnected, discharged, or a new battery is

installed, the dimmer switch requires re-calibration. Rotate the dimmer

switch from the full dim position to the full dome/on position to reset.

This will ensure that your displays are visible under all lighting

conditions.

AIMING THE HEADLAMPS

The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant.

If your vehicle has been in an accident the alignment of your headlamps

should be checked by your authorized dealer.

Vertical aim adjustment

1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface,

approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters) away.

• (1) 8 feet (2.4 meters)

• (2) Center height of lamp to

ground

• (3) 25 feet (7.6 meters)

• (4) Horizontal reference line

2. Measure the height from the

center of your headlamp to the

ground and mark an 8 foot

(2.4 meter) horizontal reference line

on the vertical wall or screen at this

height (a piece of masking tape works well). The center of the lamp is

marked by a 3 mm circle on the headlamp lens.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Lights

3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen and

open the hood. To see a clearer light pattern for adjusting, block the

light from one headlamp while adjusting the other.

For vehicles with halogen headlamps:

On the wall or screen you will

observe a flat zone of high intensity

light located at the top of the right

hand portion of the beam pattern. If

the top edge of the high intensity

light zone is not at the horizontal

reference line, the headlamp will

need to be adjusted.

For vehicles with HID headlamps:

There is a distinct cut-off (change

from light to dark) in the left

portion of the beam pattern. The

top edge of this cut-off should be

positioned two inches (50.8 mm)

below the horizontal reference line.

4. Locate the vertical adjuster on each headlamp.

• Halogen headlamp (1)

• HID headlamp (2)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Lights

5. Then use a 7mm Allen wrench or a Phillips screwdriver to adjust the

headlamp up or down. HORIZONTAL AIM IS NOT REQUIRED FOR THIS

VEHICLE AND IS NON-ADJUSTABLE.

6. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.

TURN SIGNAL CONTROL

• Push down to activate the left

turn signal.

• Push up to activate the right turn

signal.

The flash rate of the turn signal indicator will speed up considerably if

any of the turn signal lamps are out.

Note: For sequential rear turn signal lamps, an outage of the inner most

of the three compartments will result in this rapid flash rate.

INTERIOR LAMPS

Map lamps

Press the controls on either side of

the lamp to turn the light on.

BULB REPLACEMENT

Lamp assembly condensation

Exterior lamps are vented to accommodate normal changes in pressure.

Condensation can be a natural by-product of this design. When moist air

enters the lamp assembly through the vents, there is a possibility that

condensation can occur when the temperature is cold. When normal

condensation occurs, a thin film of mist can form on the interior of the

lens. The thin mist eventually clears and exits through the vents during

normal operation. Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours under dry

weather conditions.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Lights

Examples of acceptable condensation are:

• Presence of thin mist (no streaks, drip marks or droplets)

• Fine mist covers less than 50% of the lens

Examples of unacceptable moisture (usually caused by a lamp water

leak) are:

• Water puddle inside the lamp

• Large water droplets, drip marks or streaks present on the interior of

the lens

Take your vehicle to dealer for service if any of the above conditions of

unacceptable moisture are present.

Using the right bulbs

Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs

must be marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for North America and an

“E” for Europe to ensure lamp performance, light brightness and pattern

and safe visibility. The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly

or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn

time.

Function

Trade Number

Headlamp (halogen)

H13

* HID (high intensity discharge) headlamp

(if equipped)

D3S

Front park lamp, turn lamp (halogen)

Front park, turn lamp (HID)

Sidemarker (front/rear)

3457 or 3457K

3457AK (amber)

194

9145–GT or H11–Pony

(if equipped)

L1230R-3N and

L3230R-4CX

Non-replaceable LEDs

912

Fog lamp

Tail lamp, brake lamp, turn lamp (LED)

* High-mount stoplamp (LED)

Backup lamp

License plate lamp

C5WL

All replacement bulbs are clear in color except where noted.

To replace all instrument panel lights - see your authorized dealer.

* To replace these lamps - see your authorized dealer.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Lights

Replacing interior bulbs

Check the operation of all bulbs frequently.

Replacing exterior bulbs

Check the operation of all bulbs frequently.

Replacing headlamp bulbs

To remove the headlamp bulb:

1. Make sure headlamp switch is in the off position, then open the hood.

2. Disconnect the electrical

connector from the bulb by

depressing the retainer clip and

pulling rearward.

3. Remove the bulb by rotating it

counterclockwise and pulling it

straight out.

WARNING: Handle a

halogen headlamp bulb

carefully and keep out of

children’s reach. Grasp the bulb

only by its plastic base and do not

touch the glass. The oil from your

hand could cause the bulb to

break the next time the

headlamps are operated.

Install the new bulb in reverse order.

Replacing HID headlamp bulbs (if equipped)

The headlamps on your vehicle use a “high intensity discharge” source.

These lamps operate at a high voltage. When the bulb is burned out, the

bulb and starter capsule assembly must be replaced by your authorized

dealer.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Lights

Replacing front parking lamp/turn signal bulbs

1. Make sure the headlamp control is in the off position and open the

hood.

Halogen headlamp

HID headlamp

2. Remove the hex head screws attaching the underbody forward

aeroshield and remove to gain access to the front parking lamp/ turn

signal assembly.

3. Rotate the socket counterclockwise and remove from the lamp

assembly.

4. Carefully pull the bulb straight out of socket.

Install the new bulb in reverse order.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Lights

Replacing front sidemarker bulb

1. Make sure the headlamp control is in the off position.

2. Remove the hex head screws

attaching the underbody forward

aeroshield and remove to gain

access to the front sidemarker

assembly.

3. Rotate the socket counterclockwise and remove from the lamp

assembly.

4. Carefully pull the bulb straight

out of socket.

Replacing tail lamp/brake/rear turn signal lamps

See your authorized dealer for replacement LED assembly.

The tail lamp, the brake lamp and the turn signal lamp are located in the

tail lamp assembly. Follow the same steps to replace these lamps.

1. Make sure the headlamp switch is

in the off position, then open the

trunk.

2. Carefully remove the fasteners

around the lamp area and then

remove the interior trunk trim.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Lights

3. Unbolt the three tail lamp

attachment nuts and remove the

lamp assembly.

4. Rotate the LED assembly

counterclockwise and remove it

from the lamp assembly.

5. Disconnect the LED assembly

from the electrical connector and

replace the LED assembly.

6. Install new LED assembly in

reverse order.

Replacing backup bulbs

The backup lamps are located in the tail lamp assembly. Follow the same

steps to replace either bulb.

1. Make sure the headlamp switch is

in the off position, then open the

trunk.

2. Carefully remove the fasteners

around the lamp area, then remove

the interior trunk trim.

3. Unbolt the three tail lamp

attachment nuts and remove the

lamp assembly.

4. Rotate the bulb socket

counterclockwise and remove it from the lamp assembly.

5. Pull the bulb straight out from

the socket.

Install the new bulb in reverse

order.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Lights

Replacing rear sidemarker lamp bulbs

1. Make sure the headlamp switch is

in the off position and locate the

sidemarker on the rear bumper

fascia.

2. Insert a flathead screwdriver

between the rear of the sidemarker

lens and the bumper fascia.

3. Push the screwdriver to the front

of the vehicle and then slide it towards you to pop out the lamp

assembly.

4. Carefully pull the bulb straight out of socket.

Install the new bulb in reverse order.

Replacing fog lamp bulbs (GT) (if equipped)

1. Make sure the headlamp control is in the off position and open the

hood.

2. Remove the sight shield by

loosening the fasteners with a

flathead screwdriver.

3. Remove the two underhood bolts

attaching the bumper cover next to

the grill and then pull the

cover/grille/fog lamp assembly

forward to access the fog lamp

bulbs.

4. Disconnect the electrical

connector from the bulb by pulling it straight off.

5. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise and remove from the lamp assembly.

Install the new bulb in reverse order.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Lights

Replacing fog lamp bulbs (V6) (if equipped)

1. Make sure the headlamp control is in the off position and open the

hood.

2. Remove the hex head screws

attaching the underbody forward

aeroshield and remove to gain

access to the fog lamp assembly.

3. Disconnect the electrical

connector from the bulb by pulling

it straight off.

4. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise

and remove from the lamp assembly.

Install the new bulb in reverse

order.

Replacing license plate lamp bulbs

1. Make sure the headlamp switch is

in the off position.

2. Remove the two screws and the

lens from the license plate lamp

assembly.

3. Carefully pull the bulb straight

out from the lamp assembly.

Install new bulb(s) in reverse order.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Driver Controls

MULTI-FUNCTION LEVER

Windshield wiper: Rotate the end

of the control away from you to

increase the speed of the wipers;

rotate towards you to decrease the

speed of the wipers.

Windshield washer: Press the end

of the stalk:

• briefly: causes a single swipe of

the wipers without washer fluid.

• a quick press and hold: the

wipers will swipe three times with

washer fluid.

• a long press and hold: the wipers

and washer fluid will be activated

for up to ten seconds.

Courtesy wipe feature: One extra wipe will occur a few seconds after

washing the front window to clear any excess washer fluid remaining on

the windshield.

Note: Do not operate the washer when the washer reservoir is empty.

This may cause the washer pump to overheat. Check the washer fluid

level frequently. Do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry.

This may scratch the glass, damage the wiper blades and cause the wiper

motor to burn out. Before operating the wiper on a dry windshield,

always use the windshield washer. In freezing weather, be sure the wiper

blades are not frozen to the windshield before operating the wipers.

Windshield wiper rainlamp feature (if equipped with Autolamp)

When the windshield wipers are turned on during daylight, and the

headlamp control is in the autolamp position, the exterior lamps will turn

on after a brief delay and will remain on until the wipers are turned off.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Driver Controls

TILT STEERING WHEEL

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Push the lever down to unlock

the steering column. While the lever

is in the down position, tilt the

steering column to its desired

orientation.

2. While holding the steering

column, pull the lever up to its

original position to lock the steering

column.

WARNING: Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is

moving.

ELECTRONIC COMPASS (IF EQUIPPED)

The compass heading is displayed in the center integrated display (CID).

The compass reading may be affected when you drive near large

buildings, bridges, power lines and powerful broadcast antenna. Magnetic

or metallic objects placed in, on or near the vehicle may also affect

compass accuracy.

Usually, when something affects the compass readings, the compass will

correct itself after a few days of operating your vehicle in normal

conditions. If the compass still appears to be inaccurate, a manual

calibration may be necessary. Refer to Compass calibration

adjustment.

Most geographic areas (zones) have a magnetic north compass point that

varies slightly from the northerly direction on maps. This variation is four

degrees between adjacent zones and will become noticeable as the

vehicle crosses multiple zones. A correct zone setting will eliminate this

error. Refer to Compass zone adjustment.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Driver Controls

Compass zone adjustment

1. Determine which magnetic zone

you are in for your geographic

location by referring to the zone

map.

3 2

2. Turn ignition to the on position.

7 8 91011

3. Press and hold the 7 and 9 radio

preset buttons together for

approximately five seconds until

ZONE XX appears in the CID.

4. Press and release the 7 and 9

radio preset buttons together,

repeatedly until ZONE XX changes

to the correct zone (1–15) in the

CID.

5. The direction will display after

the buttons are released. The zone

is now updated.

Compass calibration adjustment

Perform compass calibration in an open area free from steel structures

and high voltage lines. For optimum calibration, turn off all electrical

accessories (heater/air conditioning, wipers, etc.) and make sure all

vehicle doors are shut.

1. Start the vehicle.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Driver Controls

2. To calibrate, press and hold the 7

and 9 radio preset buttons together

for approximately 10 seconds until

CAL appears. Release the buttons.

3. Slowly drive the vehicle in a

circle (less than 3 mph [5 km/h])

until the CAL display changes to the

direction value (N, S, E, W, etc.). It

may take up to five circles to

complete calibration.

4. The compass is now calibrated.

CENTER CONSOLE

Your vehicle is equipped with a

variety of console features. These

include:

• Dual cupholders in front of

console (pull door open to

access)

• Lockable storage bin (use ignition

key to lock/unlock the console bin

and press the latch to open the

console)

• Auxiliary power point

• Coin holder slots

• Audio input jack

• USB port (if equipped)

WARNING: Use only soft cups in the cupholder. Hard objects

can injure you in a collision.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Driver Controls

AUXILIARY POWER POINT (12VDC)

Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert

any other object in the power outlet as this will damage the

outlet and blow the fuse. Do not hang any type of accessory or

accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power

outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty.

Auxiliary power points can be found in the following locations:

• On the instrument panel

• Inside the center console storage bin

Do not use the power point for operating the cigarette lighter element (if

equipped).

To prevent the fuse from being blown, do not use the power point(s)

over the vehicle capacity of 12VDC/180W/15A. If the power point or cigar

lighter socket is not working, a fuse may have blown. Refer to Fuses and

relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter for information on

checking and replacing fuses.

To have full capacity usage of your power point, the engine is required to

be running to avoid unintentional discharge of the battery. To prevent

the battery from being discharged:

• do not use the power point longer than necessary when the engine is

not running,

• do not leave battery chargers, video game adapters, computers and

other devices plugged in overnight or when the vehicle is parked for

extended periods.

Always keep the power point caps closed when not being used.

POWER WINDOWS

WARNING: Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and

do not let children play with the power windows. They may

seriously injure themselves.

WARNING: When closing the power windows, you should verify

they are free of obstructions and ensure that children and/or

pets are not in the proximity of the window openings.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Driver Controls

Press and pull the switches to open

and close windows.

• Press down (to the first detent)

and hold the switch to open.

• Pull up (to the first detent) and

hold the switch to close.

Express-down (front windows only)

Allows the driver and passenger’s

window to open fully without

holding the control down. Press the

switch completely down to the

second detent and release quickly.

The window will open fully.

Momentarily press the switch to any

position to stop the window

operation.

AUTO

Express-up (front windows only)

Allows the driver and passenger’s

window to close fully without

holding the control up. Pull the

switch completely up to the second

detent and release quickly. The

window will close fully. Momentarily

press the switch to any position to

stop the window operation

Restoring the express-up functionality (front windows only)

Under low battery power conditions, express-up only functionality may

be lost. To reset this function after restoring full battery power, pull the

switch to the express-up position, hold the switch until the glass reaches

the stall position and continue to hold for two seconds. Press the window

switch down and operate the window to the full down position.

Express-up will now be functional. Perform express-up re-calibration

with door closed only. Calibrating with door open will cause the

window to continuously bounce back.

Bounce-back (front windows only)

When an obstacle has been detected in the window opening as the

window is moving upward, the window will automatically move down and

stop at a prescribed position.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Driver Controls

Bounce-back override (front windows only)

To override bounce-back, within two seconds after reaching bounce-back

position, if the switch is moved from the neutral to the express-up

position the window will travel up with no bounce-back protection.

If the switch is released before the window reaches fully closed position,

the window will stop. For example: bounce-back override can be used to

overcome the resistance of ice on the window or seals.

Short drop glass (front windows only)

In order to improve door efforts and sealing, your vehicle is equipped

with short drop glass. This feature lowers the glass when either door is

opened. The glass returns to its closed position when the door is closed.

Proper operation of the short drop glass requires that the windows be

calibrated. Though your windows will have been calibrated before

your vehicle is delivered to you, it is possible for the windows to

lose calibration. If a window loses its calibration, your short drop

feature will lower the window, but will not raise it again when the door is

closed. To re-calibrate the window, pull the switch up to raise the

window until it completes its travel and hold the switch up for two

seconds. Another possible effect of lost calibration is that the feature

may not lower the window. To re-calibrate the window in this case, lower

the window until it completes its travel and hold the switch down for

two seconds. Immediately after releasing the window switch, pull the

switch up to raise the window until it completes its travel and hold the

switch up for two seconds. Perform short drop re-calibration with

doors closed only. Re-calibrating with doors open will cause the

window to continuously bounce back.

Rear power windows (convertible only)

The rear quarter windows are operated by a single window switch

located at the driver door window controls. Press and pull the window

switch to open and close the windows.

• Press down and hold the switch to open.

• Pull up and hold the switch to close.

Rear power windows manual override (convertible only)

The rear quarter window switch will not operate under the following

conditions:

• Convertible top is moving

• Convertible top is not completely up or down

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Driver Controls

In the event that the rear quarter window switch does not operate when

the convertible top is completely up or down, the rear quarter windows

can be manually raised up.

The following procedure must be performed within two minutes:

1. Turn the ignition key to the off position, then turn back to the on

position.

2. Press the rear window switch down three times.

3. Turn the ignition key to the off position, then turn back to the on

position.

4. Pull and hold the rear window switch up and hold for three seconds,

the rear windows will begin to start moving up.

Accessory delay

With accessory delay, the window switches, convertible top (if equipped)

and radio may be used for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is

turned to the off position or until either front door is opened.

INTERIOR MIRROR

The interior rear view mirror has two pivot points on the support arm

which lets you adjust the mirror up or down and from side to side.

WARNING: Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in

motion.

Automatic dimming interior rear view mirror (if equipped)

Your vehicle may be equipped with an interior rear view mirror that has

an auto-dimming function. The electronic day/night mirror will change

from the normal (high reflective) state to the non-glare (darkened) state

when bright lights (glare) reach the mirror. When the mirror detects

bright light from behind the vehicle, it will automatically adjust (darken)

to minimize glare.

The mirror will automatically return to the normal state whenever the

vehicle is placed in R (Reverse) to ensure a bright clear view when

backing up.

Do not block the sensors on the front and back of the interior

rear view mirror since this may impair proper mirror

performance.

Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh

abrasives, fuel or other petroleum-based cleaning products.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Driver Controls

Note: If equipped with a rearview camera system, a video image will be

displayed in the mirror or the navigation system display (if equipped)

when the vehicle is put in R (Reverse). As you shift into any other gear

from R (Reverse), the image will remain for a few seconds and then turn

off. Refer to Rearview camera system in the Driving chapter.

EXTERIOR MIRRORS

Power side view mirrors

To adjust your mirrors:

1. Rotate the control clockwise to

adjust the right mirror and rotate

the control counterclockwise to

adjust the left mirror.

2. Move the control in the direction

you wish to tilt the mirror.

3. Return to the center position to lock mirrors in place.

SPEED CONTROL

With speed control set, you can maintain a set speed without keeping

your foot on the accelerator pedal.

WARNING: Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on

roads that are winding, slippery or unpaved.

Setting speed control

The controls for using your speed control are located on the steering

wheel.

Base controls

OFF

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Driver Controls

Optional controls

1. Press the ON control and release it.

2. Accelerate to the desired speed.

Base controls

RES

SET

Optional controls

3. Press the SET (+) control and release it.

4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

5. The indicator

light on the instrument cluster will turn on.

Note:

• Vehicle speed may vary momentarily when driving up and down a

steep hill.

• If the vehicle speed increases above the set speed on a downhill, you

may want to apply the brakes to reduce the speed.

• If the vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below

your set speed on an uphill, your speed control will disengage.

Disengaging speed control

To disengage the speed control:

• Tap the brake pedal or clutch pedal (if equipped)

Disengaging the speed control will not erase previous set speed.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Driver Controls

Resuming a set speed

Base controls

RES

SET

Optional controls

Press the RES / RESUME control and release it. This will automatically

return the vehicle to the previously set speed.

Increasing speed while using speed control

Base controls

RES

SET

Optional controls

There are two ways to set a higher speed:

• Press and hold the SET (+) control until you get to the desired speed,

then release the control. You can also use the SET (+) control to

operate the Tap-Up function. Press and release this control to increase

the vehicle set speed in small amounts by 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the desired speed. When the

vehicle reaches that speed press and release the SET (+) control.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Driver Controls

Reducing speed while using speed control

Base controls

RES

SET

Optional controls

There are two ways to reduce a set speed:

• Press and hold the SET (-) control until you get to the desired speed,

then release the control. You can also use the SET (-) control to

operate the Tap-Down function. Press and release this control to

decrease the vehicle set speed in small amounts by 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

• Press the brake pedal until the desired vehicle speed is reached and

press the SET (+) control.

Turning off speed control

There are two ways to turn off the speed control:

Base controls

OFF

Optional controls

• Press the OFF control.

• Turn off the ignition.

Note: When you turn off the speed control or the ignition, your speed

control set speed memory is erased.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Driver Controls

STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS (IF EQUIPPED)

With navigation system (if

equipped)

• Press

to use the voice

command features.

For further information on using

voice commands with the

navigation system, refer to the

Navigation System supplement.

• Press

to select the entertainment playing media (radio, CD, line in,

etc.).

• Press – VOL + to adjust the volume in any mode.

• Press

to activate phone mode.

Refer to the Navigation System supplement for more information on

using phone features.

• Press

to change radio stations/CD tracks.

Refer to the Navigation System supplement for more information on

using this feature.

With SYNC௡ system (if

equipped)

• Press

to use the voice

command features.

For further information on using

voice commands with the SYNC௡

system, refer to the SYNC௡

supplement.

• Press

to select the entertainment playing media (radio, CD, line in,

etc.).

• Press – VOL + to adjust the volume in any mode.

• Press

to activate phone mode.

Refer to the SYNC௡ supplement for more information on using phone

features.

• Press OK to confirm selections various audio and SYNC௡ selections.

For further information on the SYNC௡ system, refer to the SYNC௡

supplement.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Driver Controls

• Press

to change radio stations/CD tracks.

CONVERTIBLE (IF EQUIPPED)

Do not store articles behind rear seat. Articles stored in the convertible

top stowage compartment may break the rear glass window when the top

is lowered.

Lowering the convertible top

The convertible top can be lowered with the side windows down. The

windows will automatically lower when lowering or raising the top.

The convertible top will not operate unless the vehicle is traveling

under 3 mph (5 km/h).

Note: Lowering the convertible top when the top material is wet may

cause mold or mildew.

To lower the convertible top:

1. Bring vehicle to a complete stop. Key must be in the on position. It is

recommended that the vehicle’s engine is running when lowering the top

to prevent draining the battery.

2. Check the convertible top stowage compartment behind the rear seat

to be sure it is empty and ready to receive the top. Check the

convertible top outer surface to be sure it is free of leaves and debris.

The latch handles must be pulled

downward fully to allow the

latch to fully rotate into the

open position.

3. Unclamp the top from the

windshield header by pulling each

latch handle down and then rotating

the latch to the rear until it clears

the header.

Note: If the top has not been lowered for some time and sticks to the

windshield header, push the front of the top up slightly with your hand

to loosen it.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Driver Controls

4. Press the convertible top switch

on the overhead console and hold

until the windows are completely

down and the top is completely

stored.

Installation of the boot (if equipped)

Be sure the boot is secure on the vehicle before driving.

1. Install the boot on the vehicle by hooking the boot retaining clips on

the back panel.

2. Install the boot on the right side tucking in the front part of the boot

in the quarter panel and hooking the retaining clip on the side.

3. Install the boot on the left side tucking in the front part of the boot in

the quarter panel and hooking the retaining clip on the side.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Driver Controls

4. Tuck the boot corners behind the shoulder belts.

5. Secure the boot straps on the rear seat hooks behind the rear seat.

Note: Improper installation can result in loss and/or damage of

the boot while driving.

WARNING: Always secure the retaining clips and boot straps on

the vehicle or the boot may come loose while driving.

To remove, unhook the boot straps from the rear seat hooks and push

the boot down slightly unhooking the boot retaining clips from the

vehicle and lift off.

Storing the boot

1. Position the boot right-side up and fold each side of the boot inward.

2. Turn the boot upside down and fold the left side of the boot inward.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Driver Controls

3. Fold the right side inward and secure the boot with the strap.

Stow the boot in the trunk.

Raising the convertible top

The convertible top will not operate unless the vehicle is traveling

under 3 mph (5 km/h).

To raise the convertible top:

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop. Key must be in the on position.

It is recommended that the vehicle’s engine is running when raising the

top to prevent draining the battery.

2. Press the convertible top switch,

holding it until the windows lower

completely and the top unfolds and

moves forward toward the

windshield header.

3. You can release the convertible

top switch to open both latch

handles before the top meets the

windshield header. Note: Make sure

the latch handles are pulled down

fully for hand clearance and are

swung to the fully open position.

Note: If the top has been in the down position for an extended period or

if the temperature is low, the top material may shrink a small amount.

Pull down on the latch handles and at the center grip in the header to

fasten the top.

4. Continue to use the convertible top switch to raise the top until it has

reached the fully closed position flush to the header.

Note: The two pins under the forward edge of the top should seat

themselves in the matching holes in the header.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Driver Controls

Note: The latch handles must be pulled downwards fully to allow the

latch to fully rotate into the closed position.

5. Secure the driver’s side latch first,

then secure the passenger side. Pull

down firmly on the latch handles

before rotating them into the

windshield header until they reach

the full forward position. Pull down

on the latch handles and at the

center grip in the header to fasten

the top. Press the latch handles up

into the stowed position once the

latch is rotated into the full forward

position.

6. Raise the rear windows first and then raise the front windows.

ROLLER BLIND SUN SHADE (IF EQUIPPED)

If your vehicle is equipped with a glass roof, the roller blind sun shade

will cover the glass roof inside your vehicle.

Use the center-mounted cup handle

to slide the shade open or closed.

INTERIOR TRUNK CONTROL

The remote trunk release button is

located on the instrument panel.

Press the button to unlatch the

trunk.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Driver Controls

Interior trunk control lockout (convertible vehicles only)

This feature helps prevent unauthorized access to the trunk when the

convertible top is open, by disabling the interior trunk control.

This is useful when you want to leave the convertible top open, but still

prevent access to the trunk.

To operate this feature (the vehicle must be off and accessory power

delay not active):

Lock the vehicle using the integrated keyhead transmitter or the power

door lock switch. The interior trunk control will now be disabled.

To enable the interior trunk control:

• use the integrated keyhead transmitter to unlock the vehicle.

• or turn the ignition on.

The interior trunk control will now work normally.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Locks and Security

KEYS

Your vehicle may be equipped with

two Integrated Keyhead

Transmitters (IKTs). The key blade

functions as a programmed key

which starts the vehicle and

unlocks/locks all the doors. The

transmitter portion functions as the

remote entry transmitter.

Your IKTs are programmed to your vehicle; using a non-programmed key

will not permit your vehicle to start. If you lose your authorized dealer

supplied IKTs, replacement IKTs are available through your authorized

dealer. Standard SecuriLock௡ keys without remote entry transmitter

functionality can also be purchased from your authorized dealer if

desired.

Always carry a spare key with you in case of an emergency.

For more information regarding programming replacement IKTs, refer to

the SecuriLock௡ passive anti-theft system section later in this chapter.

Note: Your vehicle’s IKTs were

issued with a security tag that

provides important vehicle key cut

information. It is recommended that

you keep the tag in a safe place for

future reference.

POWER DOOR LOCKS

The power door lock controls are located on the driver and front

passenger door panels.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Locks and Security

Press the

doors.

control to unlock all

Press the

doors.

control to lock all

Locking and unlocking with keys

Your vehicle’s keys are designed to lock and unlock the driver’s door, as

well as open the trunk.

• The driver’s door is unlocked when the key is inserted in the driver

door key cylinder and turned to the unlock position. The driver’s door

is locked when the key is inserted in the driver door key cylinder and

turned to the lock position.

Note: If the vehicle is not equipped with active anti-theft system, locking

the driver door with the key does not lock the passenger door. Use the

power door lock control or manually lock the passenger door to ensure

the vehicle is properly secured.

Smart locks

This feature helps prevent you from locking yourself out of the vehicle if

your key is still in the ignition.

When you open the driver’s door and you lock the vehicle with the

power door lock control, all the doors will lock, then the driver’s door

will automatically unlock reminding you that your key is still in the

ignition.

The vehicle can still be locked, with the key in the ignition, using the

manual lock button on the door, locking the driver’s door with a key or

using the lock button on the remote entry transmitter.

Autolock (if equipped)

The autolock feature will automatically lock all vehicle doors when:

• all doors are closed,

• the ignition is in the on position,

• you shift into any gear putting the vehicle in motion, (for manual

transmission, the parking brake should not be engaged) and

• the vehicle attains a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Locks and Security

The autolock feature repeats when:

• any door is opened then closed while the ignition is in the on position

and the vehicle speed is 9 mph (15 km/h) or lower, and

• the vehicle attains a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h).

Deactivating/activating autolock

Your vehicle comes with the autolock feature enabled. There are three

methods to enable/disable this feature:

• Through your authorized dealer, or

• performing the power door lock control procedure, or

• performing the message center procedure. Refer to Message center in

the Instrument Cluster chapter.

Note: The autolock feature can be activated/deactivated independently

of the autounlock feature.

Before following the activation or deactivation procedures, make sure

that the active anti-theft system is not armed, ignition is in the off

position, and all vehicle doors are closed.

Power door unlock/lock procedure

You must complete Steps 1-5 within 30 seconds or the procedure will

have to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be repeated, you must

wait 30 seconds.

Note: All doors must be closed and remain closed throughout the

configuration process.

1. The ignition must be off to begin

sequence.

2. Turn the ignition to the on

position.

3. Press the power door unlock

control three times.

4. Turn the ignition from the on to

the off position.

5. Press the power door unlock control three times.

6. Turn the ignition back to the on position. The horn will chirp.

7. Press the unlock control, then press the lock control. The horn will

chirp once if autolock was deactivated or twice (one short and one long

chirp) if autolock was activated.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Locks and Security

8. Turn the ignition to the off position. The horn will chirp once to

confirm the procedure is complete.

Autounlock (if equipped)

The autounlock feature will unlock all the doors when:

• the ignition is in the on position, all the doors are closed, and the

vehicle has been in motion at a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h);

• the vehicle has then come to a stop and the ignition is turned to the

off or accessory position; and

• the driver door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being

turned to the off or accessory position.

Note: The doors will not autounlock if the vehicle has been

electronically locked before the driver door is opened.

Deactivating/activating autounlock

Your vehicle comes with the autounlock feature activated. There are

three methods to enable/disable this feature:

• Through your authorized dealer, or

• by using the power door unlock/lock sequence,

• by using the instrument cluster message center. Refer to Message

center in the Instrument Cluster chapter.

Note: The autounlock feature can be activated/deactivated

independently of the autolock feature.

Power door lock switch autounlock enable/disable procedure

Before starting, ensure the ignition is in the off position and all vehicle

doors are closed. You must complete Steps 1–5 within 30 seconds or the

procedure will have to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be

repeated, wait a minimum of 30 seconds before beginning again.

1. Place the key in the ignition and

turn the ignition to the on position.

2. Press the power door unlock

control on the door panel three

times.

3. Turn the ignition from the on

position to the off position.

4. Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times.

5. Turn the ignition back to the on position. The horn will chirp one time

to confirm programming mode has been entered and is active.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Locks and Security

6. To enable/disable the autounlock feature, press the lock control, then

press the unlock control. The horn will chirp once if autounlock was

deactivated or twice (one short and one long chirp) if autounlock was

activated.

7. Turn the ignition to the off position. The horn will chirp once to

confirm the procedure is complete.

INTERIOR LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT RELEASE

Your vehicle is equipped with a mechanical interior luggage compartment

release handle that provides a means of escape for children and adults in

the event they become locked inside the luggage compartment.

Adults are advised to familiarize themselves with the operation and

location of the release handle.

To open the luggage compartment

door (lid) from within the luggage

compartment, pull the illuminated

“T” shaped handle and push up on

the trunk lid. The handle is

composed of a material that will

glow for hours in darkness following

brief exposure to ambient light.

The “T” shaped handle will be

located either on the luggage

compartment door (lid) or inside

the luggage compartment near the

tail lamps.

WARNING: Keep vehicle

doors and luggage

compartment locked and keep

keys and remote transmitters out

of a child’s reach. Unsupervised

children could lock themselves in

the trunk and risk injury. Children

should be taught not to play in

vehicles.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Locks and Security

WARNING: Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or animals

unattended in the vehicle. On hot days, the temperature in the

trunk or vehicle interior can rise very quickly. Exposure of people or

animals to these high temperatures for even a short time can cause

death or serious heat-related injuries, including brain damage. Small

children are particularly at risk.

REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM

The integrated keyhead transmitter (IKT) complies with part 15 of the

FCC rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to

the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful

interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party

responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to

operate the equipment.

The typical operating range for your IKT is approximately 33 feet

(10 meters). A decrease in operating range could be caused by:

• weather conditions,

• nearby radio towers,

• structures around the vehicle, or

• other vehicles parked next to your vehicle.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Locks and Security

The IKT allows you to:

• remotely unlock the vehicle

doors.

• remotely lock all the vehicle

doors.

• remotely open the trunk.

• activate the personal alarm.

• arm and disarm the active

anti-theft system.

• operate the illuminated entry

feature.

The remote entry lock/unlock feature operates in any ignition position

except while the key is held in the start position. The panic feature

operates with the key in the off position.

If there are problems with the remote entry system, make sure to take

ALL integrated keyhead transmitters with you to the authorized

dealer in order to aid in troubleshooting the problem.

Unlocking the doors/two-stage unlock

1. Press

and release to unlock the driver’s door. Note: The interior

lamps will illuminate.

2. Press

and release again within five seconds to unlock the

passenger door.

The remote entry system activates the illuminated entry feature; this

feature turns on the lamps for 25 seconds or until the ignition is turned

to the on position.

The inside lights will not turn off if:

• they have been turned on using the dimmer control or

• any door is open.

The battery saver feature will turn off the interior lamps 30 minutes after

the ignition is turned to the off position.

Two-stage unlocking may be disabled or re-enabled by simultaneously

pressing the

and

controls on the IKT for four seconds (disabling

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Locks and Security

two stage unlock allows all vehicle doors to unlock simultaneously). The

turn lamps will flash twice to indicate that two-stage unlock was enabled

or disabled.

Locking the doors

1. Press

and release to lock all the doors. The turn signal lamps will

illuminate. Note: The interior lamps will turn off (unless the dome lamp

control is in the full-up position), and the turn signal lamps will flash if

all doors, trunk and hood (if equipped with active anti-theft system) are

closed. If the vehicle is not equipped with the active anti-theft system,

the turn signal lamps will flash if all doors, trunk and hood are closed.

The parking lamps will illuminate.

2. Press

and release again within three seconds to confirm that all

the doors, trunk and hood are closed. Note: The doors will lock again,

the horn will chirp once and the turn signal lamps will flash once more.

If any of the doors, trunk or hood (if equipped with active anti-theft

system) are not properly closed the horn will make two quick chirps and

the turn signal lamps will not flash. If the vehicle is not equipped with

the active anti-theft system, the horn will make two quick chirps and the

turn signal lamps will not flash if either door or the trunk are not closed.

Car finder

Press

twice within three seconds. The horn will chirp and the turn

lamps will flash. It is recommended that this method be used to locate

your vehicle, rather than using the panic alarm.

Sounding a panic alarm

Press

and interior lamps will flash for a maximum of approximately three

minutes. Press again or turn the ignition to the accessory or on

to activate the alarm. The horn will sound and the turn signal

position to deactivate, or wait for the alarm to time-out in approximately

three minutes.

Note: The panic alarm will only operate when the ignition is in the off

position.

Opening the trunk

Press

twice to open the trunk.

• Ensure that the trunk is closed and latched before driving your

vehicle. Failure to properly latch the trunk may cause objects to fall

out or block the driver’s rear view.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Locks and Security

The remote entry system allows you to open the trunk while the ignition

is in any position. However, if the ignition is in the on position and the

vehicle is in motion, the trunk will not open if the vehicle is moving

3 mph (5 km/h) or faster.

In the event of battery failure, you

can open the trunk on the

convertible by using your master

key in the key cylinder between

the seat cushion located in the

back seat on the driver’s side.

Replacing the battery

The integrated keyhead transmitter uses one coin type three-volt lithium

battery CR2032 or equivalent.

To replace the battery:

1. Twist a thin coin in the slot of the

IKT near the key ring in order to

remove the battery cover.

Note: Do not wipe off any grease on

the battery terminals on the back

surface of the circuit board.

2. Remove the old battery.

Note: Please refer to local

regulations when disposing of

transmitter batteries.

3. Insert the new battery. Refer to

the instructions inside the IKT for

the correct orientation of the

battery. Press the battery down to

ensure that the battery is fully

seated in the battery housing cavity.

4. Snap the battery cover back onto

the key.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Locks and Security

Note: Replacement of the battery will not cause the IKT to become

deprogrammed from your vehicle. The IKT should operate normally after

battery replacement.

Replacing lost integrated keyhead transmitters (IKTs)

If you would like to have your integrated keyhead transmitters

reprogrammed because you lost one, or would like to buy additional

IKTs, you can either reprogram them yourself, or take all IKTs to your

authorized dealer for reprogramming.

How to reprogram your integrated keyhead transmitters (IKTs)

To program a new integrated keyhead transmitter yourself, refer to

Programming spare keys in the SecuriLock௡ passive anti-theft system

section of this chapter. Note: At least two IKTs are required to perform

this procedure yourself.

Illuminated entry

The interior lamps and turn signal lamps illuminate when the integrated

keyhead transmitter is used to unlock the door(s).

The illuminated entry system will turn off the interior lights if:

• the ignition switch is turned to the on position, or

• the integrated keyhead transmitter lock control is pressed, or

• after 25 seconds of illumination.

The inside lights will not turn off if:

• they have been turned on with the dimmer control, or

• any door is open.

Illuminated exit

• When all vehicle doors are closed and the key is removed from the

ignition, the interior dome lamp and the turn signal lamps will

illuminate.

The lights will turn off if all the doors remain closed and:

• 25 seconds elapse, or

• the key is inserted in the ignition.

100

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Locks and Security

Battery saver

The battery saver will shut off the interior lamps 10 minutes after the

ignition has been turned to the off position and a door is left open, and

in 30 minutes if the dome lamp control is left on and the ignition has

been turned to the off position. The battery saver will also shut off the

trunk lamps in 30 minutes if the trunk is left open.

SECURILOCKா PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM

SecuriLock௡ passive anti-theft system is an engine immobilization

system. This system is designed to help prevent the engine from being

started unless a coded integrated keyhead transmitter (IKT)

programmed to your vehicle is used. The use of the wrong type of

coded key may lead to a “no-start” condition.

Your vehicle comes with two coded integrated keyhead transmitters;

additional coded IKTs may be purchased from your authorized dealer.

Standard SecuriLock௡ keys without remote entry transmitter

functionality can also be purchased from your authorized dealer if

desired. The authorized dealer can program your spare IKTs to your

vehicle or you can program the IKTs yourself. Refer to Programming

spare keys for instructions on how to program the coded key.

Note: The SecuriLock௡ passive anti-theft system is not compatible with

non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems. Use of these systems may

result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection.

Note: Large metallic objects, electronic devices that are used to

purchase gasoline or similar items, or a second coded key on the same

key chain may cause vehicle starting issues. You need to prevent these

objects from touching the coded IKT while starting the engine. These

objects will not cause damage to the coded IKT, but may cause a

momentary issue if they are too close to the IKT when starting the

engine. If a problem occurs, turn the ignition off, remove all objects on

the key chain away from the coded IKT and restart the engine.

Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key in the vehicle. Always

take your keys and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle.

101

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Locks and Security

Anti-theft indicator

The anti-theft indicator is located in the instrument cluster.

• When the ignition is in the off

position, the indicator will flash

once every two seconds to

indicate the SecuriLock௡ system

is functioning as a theft

deterrent.

• When the ignition is in the on position, the indicator will glow for

three seconds, then turn off to indicate normal system functionality.

If a problem occurs with the SecuriLock௡ system, the indicator will flash

rapidly or glow steadily when the ignition is in the on position. If this

occurs, turn the ignition off then back to on to make sure there was no

electronic interference with the programmed key. If the vehicle doesn’t

start, try to start it with the 2nd programmed key and if successful

contact your authorized dealership for key replacement. If the indicator

still flashes rapidly or glows steadily, the vehicle will not start, contact

your authorized dealer as soon as possible for service.

Automatic arming

The vehicle is armed immediately after switching the ignition to the off

position.

The theft indicator will flash every

two seconds to act as a theft

deterrent when the vehicle is

armed.

Automatic disarming

Switching the ignition to the on position with a coded key disarms the

vehicle.

• The theft indicator will illuminate for three seconds and then go out.

• If the theft indicator stays on for an extended period of time or

flashes rapidly, contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Replacement integrated keyhead transmitters (IKT) and coded keys

Note: Your vehicle comes equipped with two integrated keyhead

transmitters (IKTs). The IKT functions as both a programmed ignition

key that operates all the locks and starts the vehicle, as well as a remote

keyless entry transmitter. A maximum of eight coded keys can be

102

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Locks and Security

programmed to your vehicle; only four of these eight keys can be IKTs

with remote entry functionality.

If your IKTs or standard SecuriLock௡ coded keys are lost or stolen and

you don’t have an extra coded key, you will need to have your vehicle

towed to an authorized dealer. The key codes need to be erased from

your vehicle and new coded keys will need to be programmed.

Replacing coded keys can be very costly. Store an extra programmed key

away from the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any

inconveniences. Please visit an authorized dealer to purchase additional

spare or replacement keys.

Programming spare keys

You can program your own integrated keyhead transmitters or standard

SecuriLock௡ coded keys to your vehicle. This procedure will program

both the engine immobilizer keycode and the remote entry transmitter

portion of the IKT to your vehicle. Note: A maximum of eight coded

keys can be programmed to your vehicle; only four of these eight can be

IKTs with remote entry functionality.

Tips:

• Only use integrated keyhead transmitters (IKTs) or standard

SecuriLock௡ keys.

• You must have two previously programmed coded keys (keys that

already operate your vehicle’s engine) and the new unprogrammed

key(s) readily accessible.

• If two previously programmed coded keys are not available, you must

take your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the spare key(s)

programmed.

Please read and understand the

entire procedure before you begin.

1. Insert the first previously

programmed coded key into the

ignition.

2. Turn the ignition from the 1 (off)

position to the 3 (on) position. Keep

the ignition in the 3 (on) position

for at least three seconds, but no

more than 10 seconds.

3. Turn the ignition to the 1 (off) position and remove the first coded

key from the ignition.

103

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Locks and Security

4. After three seconds but within 10 seconds of turning the ignition to

the 1 (off) position, insert the second previously coded key into the

ignition.

5. Turn the ignition from the 1 (off) position to the 3 (on) position. Keep

the ignition in the 3 (on) position for at least three seconds, but no more

than 10 seconds.

6. Turn the ignition to the 1 (off) position and remove the second

previously programmed coded key from the ignition.

7. After three seconds but within 20 seconds of turning the ignition to

the 1 (off) position and removing the previously programmed coded

key, insert the new unprogrammed key (new key/valet key) into the

ignition.

8. Turn the ignition from the 1 (off) position to the 3 (on) position. Keep

the ignition in the 3 (on) position for at least six seconds.

9. Remove the newly programmed coded key from the ignition.

If the key has been successfully programmed it will start the vehicle’s

engine and will operate the remote entry system (if the new key is an

integrated keyhead transmitter). The theft indicator light will illuminate

for three seconds and then go out to indicate successful programming.

If the key was not successfully programmed, it will not start your

vehicle’s engine and/or will not operate the remote entry features. The

theft indicator light may flash on and off. Wait 20 seconds and you may

repeat Steps 1 through 8. If failure repeats, bring your vehicle to your

authorized dealer to have the new key(s) programmed.

To program additional new unprogrammed key(s), wait 20 seconds and

then repeat this procedure from Step 1.

ACTIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

The active anti-theft system is designed to warn you in the event of an

unauthorized entry to your vehicle and is also designed to help prevent

the unwanted towing of the vehicle.

When the vehicle is locked and armed, the active anti-theft system

monitors the following:

• Doors

• Hood

• Trunk

• Movement inside the vehicle

104

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Locks and Security

• Change in vehicle inclination

Note: The active anti-theft system includes a motion detection system

which monitors the passenger cabin and a vehicle incline sensor which

detects changes in vehicle attitude.

The interior motion detection and vehicle incline sensing systems

will operate only when the vehicle is locked using the remote

keyless entry transmitter or when using the power door lock

control with the accompanying door open and all doors then

become closed. For convertible vehicles, the convertible top must

be in the fully closed and latched position for the interior motion

sensing system to arm. If you lock the vehicle using the key in the

driver door key cylinder, the system will monitor the doors,

trunk, and hood but the interior motion sensing and vehicle

incline sensing will not arm.

Do not arm the interior motion detection system if movement within the

vehicle is likely to occur. Additionally, do not arm the vehicle incline

sensing system when the vehicle is in transport.

For proper operation of the interior motion detection system, ensure all

windows are closed prior to arming the system. This will help prevent

accidental alarm activation due to external influences and ensure proper

interior motion detection. Additionally, the interior motion sensing

system will not arm if either door or the trunk is ajar.

If there is any potential perimeter anti-theft problem with your vehicle,

ensure ALL integrated keyhead transmitters are brought to the

authorized dealer to aid in troubleshooting.

Arming the system

When armed, the active anti-theft system is designed to notify you of an

unauthorized entry. When unauthorized entry or towing occurs, the

system will flash the turn signal lamps and interior lamps and will sound

the horn.

The system is ready to arm whenever the key is out of the ignition. Any

of the following actions will arm the alarm system:

• Press the

control on the remote entry transmitter portion of your

integrated keyhead transmitter.

• Lock all doors using the interior power lock switch while the driver or

passenger door is open and then becomes closed.

• Lock the driver door with the key in the key lock cylinder (this will

not however arm the interior motion or vehicle incline sensing

systems).

105

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Locks and Security

There is a 20 second countdown when any of the above actions occur

before the vehicle becomes armed.

Each door, the hood or the trunk is armed individually, and if any are

open, they must be closed for the system to enter the 20 second

countdown.

The turn signal lamps will flash once when all doors, the hood and the

trunk are closed indicating the vehicle is locked and entering the

20 second countdown. If any closure is not properly closed the turn

signal lamps will not flash and that closure will not be armed.

Disarming the system

You can disarm the system by any of the following actions:

• Unlock the doors by using the remote entry transmitter portion of

your integrated keyhead transmitter.

• Turn ignition to the on position with a valid programmed SecuriLock௡

key or integrated keyhead transmitter (IKT).

• Press the panic control on the remote entry transmitter portion of

your IKT. This will only shut off the horn and turn lamps when the

alarm is sounding. The alarm system will still be armed.

• Use a key in the driver’s door to unlock the vehicle.

Pressing the power door unlock control within the 20 second prearmed

mode will return the vehicle to a disarmed state.

Note: Unlocking the trunk inhibits the motion sensing system but the

system continues to monitor the doors, hood and vehicle incline. Once

the trunk becomes closed the motion sensing system will rearm.

Triggering the anti-theft system

The armed system will be triggered if:

• Any door, the hood or the trunk is opened without using the remote

entry transmitter portion of your IKT or key in driver door cylinder.

• The ignition is turned to the on position with an invalid

unprogrammed SecuriLock௡ key or IKT.

• The vehicle is towed/inclined.

• Motion is detected in the interior passenger compartment.

106

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Seating and Safety Restraints

SEATING

WARNING: Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to

slide under the seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal

injuries in the event of a collision.

WARNING: Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to

reduce the risk of injury in a collision or sudden stop.

WARNING: Before returning the seatback to its original

position, make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped

behind the seatback. After returning the seatback to its original

position, pull on the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched. An

unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or

collision.

Adjustable head restraints

Your vehicle is equipped with front row outboard head restraints that are

vertically adjustable.

WARNING: To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a

crash, the driver and passenger occupants should not sit in

and/or operate the vehicle, until the head restraint is placed in its

proper position. The driver should never adjust the head restraint

while the vehicle is in motion.

The adjustable head restraints

consist of:

• a trimmed energy absorbing foam

and structure (1),

• two steel stems (2),

• a guide sleeve adjust/release

button (3),

• and a guide sleeve unlock/remove

button (4).

107

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Seating and Safety Restraints

To adjust the head restraint, do the following:

1. Adjust the seatback to an upright driving/riding position.

2. Raise the head restraint by

pulling up on the head restraint.

3. Lower the head restraint by

pressing and holding the guide

sleeve adjust/release button and

pushing down on the head restraint.

Properly adjust the head restraint so that the top of the head restraint is

even with the top of your head and positioned as close as possible to the

back of your head. For occupants of extremely tall stature, adjust the

head restraint to its full up position.

WARNING: The adjustable head restraint is a safety device.

Whenever possible it should be installed and properly adjusted

when the seat is occupied.

108

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Seating and Safety Restraints

To remove the adjustable head restraint, do the following:

1. Pull up the head restraint until it

reaches the highest adjustment

position.

2. Simultaneously press and hold

both the adjust/release button and

the unlock/remove button, then pull

up on the head restraint.

To reinstall the adjustable head restraint, do the following:

1. Insert the two stems into the

guide sleeve collars.

2. Push the head restraint down

until it locks.

Properly adjust the head restraint so that the top of the head restraint is

even with the top of your head and positioned as close as possible to the

back of your head. For occupants of extremely tall stature, adjust the

head restraint to its full up position.

109

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Seating and Safety Restraints

WARNING: To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a

crash, head restraints must be installed properly.

Adjusting the manual seats (if equipped)

WARNING: Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the

vehicle is moving.

WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright

and the lap belt snug and low across the hips.

Lift handle to move seat forward or

backward.

Pull lever up to adjust the angle of

the seatback.

110

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Seating and Safety Restraints

Four-way seat adjust (driver side only)

Pump the handle upwards to raise

the cushion and pump downward to

lower the cushion to the desired

location.

Using the power lumbar support (if equipped)

The power lumbar control is located

on the top of the driver’s seat side

shield.

Press one side of the control to

increase lower back firmness.

Press the other side of the control

to decrease lower back firmness.

Adjusting the power seats (if equipped)

WARNING: Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the

vehicle is moving.

WARNING: Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to avoid

injuring people in a collision or sudden stop.

WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright

and the lap belt snug and low across the hips.

WARNING: Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to

slide under the seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal

injuries in the event of a collision.

111

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Seating and Safety Restraints

WARNING: Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat

back reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion

and affect the decision of the passenger sensing system, resulting in

serious injury or death in a crash. Always sit upright against your

seatback, with your feet on the floor.

WARNING: To reduce the risk of possible serious injury: Do not

hang objects off seat back or stow objects in the seatback map

pocket (if equipped) when a child is in the front passenger seat. Do

not place objects underneath the front passenger seat or between the

seat and the center console (if equipped). Check the “passenger airbag

off” or “pass airbag off” indicator lamp for proper airbag status. Refer

to Front passenger sensing system section for additional details.

Failure to follow these instructions may interfere with the front

passenger seat sensing system.

The power seat control is located on

the outboard side of the seat

(illustration shows the driver’s seat).

Move the switch in the direction of

the arrows to raise or lower the

front portion of the seat cushion.

112

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Seating and Safety Restraints

Move the switch in the direction of

the arrows to raise or lower the rear

portion of the seat cushion.

Press the switch in the direction of

the arrows to move the seat

forward, backward, up or down.

Heated seats (if equipped)

WARNING: Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin

because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord

injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical

conditions, must exercise care when using the seat heater. The seat

heater may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used

for long periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat that

insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion, because this may

cause the seat heater to overheat. Do not puncture the seat with pins,

needles, or other pointed objects because this may damage the heating

element which may cause the seat heater to overheat. An overheated

seat may cause serious personal injury.

Note: Do not do the following:

• Place heavy objects on the seat

• Operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid is spilled on the

seat. Allow the seat to dry thoroughly.

The heated seat control is located in the lower center of the instrument

panel.

113

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Seating and Safety Restraints

To operate the heated seats:

• Press control to activate.

• Press again to deactivate.

The heated seats will only function when the engine is running.

Rear seat entry/exit

Use the seatback release to fold the

back of the front seat forward for

rear seat access. This release handle

is located on the upper back of the

front seat. The seatback locks

automatically when returned to the

normal position.

Use the recliner handle to return

the seatback to the desired position.

REAR SEATS

2nd seat/split-folding rear seat

One or both rear seatbacks (coupe only) can be folded down to provide

additional cargo space.

114

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Seating and Safety Restraints

To lower the seatback(s) from

inside the vehicle, be sure the head

restraint is in the upright position,

pull the strap to release the

seatback and then fold the seatback

down.

When raising the seatback(s), make sure you hear the seat latch into

place. Pull down on the seatback to ensure that it has latched.

WARNING: Before returning the seatback to its original

position, make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped

behind the seatback. After returning the seatback to its original

position, pull on the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched. An

unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or

collision.

SAFETY RESTRAINTS

Personal Safety System™

The Personal Safety System™ provides an improved overall level of

frontal crash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to help

further reduce the risk of airbag-related injuries. The system is able to

analyze different occupant conditions and crash severity before activating

the appropriate safety devices to help better protect a range of

occupants in a variety of frontal crash situations.

Your vehicle’s Personal Safety System™ consists of:

• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints.

• Driver and front passenger side airbags.

• Front safety belts with pretensioners, energy management retractors,

and safety belt usage sensors.

• Driver’s seat position sensor.

• Front crash severity sensor.

• Front passenger sensing system.

• “Passenger airbag off” or “pass airbag off” indicator lamp.

115

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Seating and Safety Restraints

• Restraints Control Module (RCM) with impact and safing sensors.

• Restraint system warning light and back-up tone.

• The electrical wiring for the airbags, crash sensor(s), safety belt

pretensioners, front safety belt usage sensors, driver seat position

sensor, front passenger sensing system, and indicator lights.

How does the Personal Safety System™ work?

The Personal Safety System™ can adapt the deployment strategy of your

vehicle’s safety devices according to crash severity and conditions. A

collection of crash sensors provides information to the Restraints Control

Module (RCM). During a crash, the RCM may activate the safety belt

pretensioners and/or either none, one, or both stages of the dual-stage

airbag supplemental restraints based on crash severity and conditions.

The fact that the pretensioners or airbags did not activate for both front

seat occupants in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with

the system. Rather, it means the Personal Safety System™ determined

the accident conditions (crash severity, belt usage, etc.) were not

appropriate to activate these safety devices. Front airbags are designed

to activate only in frontal and near-frontal collisions, not rollovers,

side-impacts, or rear-impacts unless the collision causes sufficient

longitudinal deceleration.

Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints

The dual-stage airbags offer the capability to tailor the level of airbag

inflation energy. A lower, less forceful energy level is provided for more

common, moderate-severity impacts. A higher energy level is used for

the most severe impacts. Refer to Airbag supplemental restraints

(SRS) section in this chapter.

Front crash severity sensor

The front crash severity sensor enhances the ability to detect the

severity of an impact. Positioned up front, it provides valuable

information early in the crash event on the severity of the impact. This

allows your Personal Safety System™ to distinguish between different

levels of crash severity and modify the deployment strategy of the

dual-stage airbags and safety belt pretensioners.

Driver’s seat position sensor

The driver’s seat position sensor allows your Personal Safety System™ to

tailor the deployment level of the driver dual-stage airbag based on seat

position. The system is designed to help protect smaller drivers sitting

close to the driver airbag by providing a lower airbag output level.

116

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Seating and Safety Restraints

Front passenger sensing system

For airbags to do their job they must inflate with great force, and this

force can pose a potentially deadly risk to occupants that are very close

to the airbag when it begins to inflate. For some occupants, like infants

in rear-facing child seats, this occurs because they are initially sitting

very close to the airbag. For other occupants, this occurs when the

occupant is not properly restrained by safety belts or child safety seats

and they move forward during pre-crash braking. The most effective way

to reduce the risk of unnecessary injuries is to make sure all occupants

are properly restrained. Accident statistics suggest that children are

much safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in

the front.

WARNING: Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.

NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active air

bag. If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move

the seat all the way back.

WARNING: When possible, all children 12 years old and under

should be properly restrained in a rear seating position.

The front passenger sensing system can automatically turn off the

passenger front airbag. The system is designed to help protect small

(child size) occupants from airbag deployments when they are

improperly seated or restrained in the front passenger seat contrary to

proper child-seating or restraint usage recommendations. Even with this

technology, parents are STRONGLY encouraged to always properly

restrain children in the rear seat. The sensor also turns off the passenger

front airbag and side airbag when the passenger seat is empty to prevent

unnecessary replacement of airbag(s) after a collision.

When the front passenger seat is occupied and the sensing system has

turned off the passenger’s frontal airbag, the “pass airbag off” indicator

will light and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal

airbag is off. See Front passenger sensing system in the Airbag

supplemental restraints (SRS) section of this chapter.

Front safety belt usage sensors

The front safety belt usage sensors detect whether or not the driver and

front outboard passenger safety belts are fastened. This information

allows your Personal Safety System™ to tailor the airbag deployment

and safety belt pretensioner activation depending upon safety belt usage.

117

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Seating and Safety Restraints

Front safety belt pretensioners

The safety belt pretensioners at the front outboard seating positions are

designed to tighten the safety belts firmly against the occupant’s body

during frontal collisions, and in side collisions. This helps increase the

effectiveness of the safety belts. In frontal collisions, the safety belt

pretensioners can be activated alone or, if the collision is of sufficient

severity, together with the front airbags.

Front safety belt energy management retractors

The front outboard safety belt energy management retractors allow

webbing to be pulled out of the retractor in a gradual and controlled

manner in response to the occupant’s forward momentum. This helps

reduce the risk of force-related injuries to the occupant’s chest by

limiting the load on the occupant.

Determining if the Personal Safety System™ is operational

The Personal Safety System™ uses a warning light in the instrument

cluster or a back-up tone to indicate the condition of the system. Refer

to the Warning lights and chimes section in the Instrument Cluster

chapter. Routine maintenance of the Personal Safety System™ is not

required.

The Restraints Control Module (RCM) monitors its own internal circuits

and the circuits for the airbag supplemental restraints, crash sensor(s),

safety belt pretensioners, front safety belt buckle sensors, front

passenger sensing system, and the driver seat position sensor. In

addition, the RCM also monitors the restraints warning light in the

instrument cluster. A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or

more of the following.

• The warning light will either flash or stay lit.

• The warning light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is

turned on.

• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat

periodically until the problem and warning light are repaired.

If any of these things happen, even intermittently, contact your

authorized dealer as soon as possible. Unless serviced, the system may

not function properly in the event of a collision.

Safety restraints precautions

WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright

and the lap belt snug and low across the hips.

118

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Seating and Safety Restraints

WARNING: To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit

in a rear seating position where they can be properly restrained.

WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap

while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the

child from injury in a collision.

WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver,

should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an

airbag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.

WARNING: It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,

inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in

these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not

allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped

with seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a

seat and using a safety belt properly.

WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is

significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a safety

belt.

WARNING: Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific

safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one

tongue that are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt

on the outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the

arm. 2) Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside

shoulder. 3) Never use a single belt for more than one person.

WARNING: When possible, all children 12 years old and under

should be properly restrained in a rear seating position.

WARNING: Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle

that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a

small child. Check seat covers and buckles before you place a child

anywhere near them.

119

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Seating and Safety Restraints

WARNING: Front and rear seat occupants, including pregnant

women, should wear safety belts for optimum protection in an

accident.

Combination lap and shoulder belts

The presenter arm (available on the coupe only) is intended to improve

access to the safety belt and to allow access to the rear seat.

Rotate the presenter arm toward the

front of the vehicle until it locks

into place. This allows easier access

to the front safety belt for the front

seat occupant.

To access the second row seats,

rotate the arm back to its original

position against the trim panel.

1. Insert the belt tongue into the

proper buckle (the buckle closest to

the direction the tongue is coming

from) until you hear a snap and feel

it latch. Make sure the tongue is

securely fastened in the buckle.

120

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Seating and Safety Restraints

2. To unfasten, press the release

button and remove the tongue from

the buckle.

WARNING: The center of the rear seat is NOT designed as a

seating position and is not equipped with safety belts. The

LATCH anchors were not designed to be used with a child seat in the

center position and there is no tether anchor available at the center.

Attempted use of the center as a seating position will increase the risk

of injury or death in the event of a collision.

Energy management feature

• This vehicle has a safety belt system with an energy management

feature at the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of

injury in the event of a head-on collision.

• This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to

pay out webbing in a controlled manner. This feature is designed to

help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant’s chest.

WARNING: After any vehicle collision, the safety belt system at

all outboard seating positions (except driver, which has no

“automatic locking retractor” feature) must be checked by an

authorized dealer to verify that the “automatic locking retractor”

feature for child seats is still functioning properly. In addition, all safety

belts should be checked for proper function.

WARNING: BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE

REPLACED if the safety belt assembly “automatic locking

retractor” feature or any other safety belt function is not operating

properly when checked by an authorized dealer.

121

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Seating and Safety Restraints

WARNING: Failure to replace the Belt and Retractor assembly

could increase the risk of injury in collisions.

The front and rear safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap

and shoulder belts. The front passenger and rear seat safety belts have

two types of locking modes described below:

Vehicle sensitive mode

This is the normal retractor mode, which allows free shoulder belt length

adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle

movement. For example, if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner

sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of approximately 5 mph

(8 km/h) or more, the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce

forward movement of the driver and passengers.

Automatic locking mode

The automatic locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt.

When to use the automatic locking mode

In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will

still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The automatic

locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt.

This mode should be used any time a child safety seat is installed

(except a booster) in a passenger front or outboard rear seating position.

Children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in the

rear seat whenever possible. Refer to Safety restraints for children or

Safety seats for children later in this chapter.

How to use the automatic locking mode

• Buckle the combination lap and

shoulder belt.

122

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Seating and Safety Restraints

• Grasp the shoulder portion and

pull downward until the entire

belt is pulled out.

• Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking

sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking

mode.

How to disengage the automatic locking mode

WARNING: Ford Motor Company recommends that all safety

belt assemblies and attaching hardware should be inspected by

an authorized dealer after any collision. Safety belt assemblies not in

use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either

damage or improper operation is noted.

Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract

completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the

vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.

WARNING: After any vehicle collision, the front passenger and

rear outboard safety belt systems must be checked by an

authorized dealer to verify that the “automatic locking retractor”

feature for child seats is still functioning properly. In addition, all safety

belts should be checked for proper function.

WARNING: BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE

REPLACED if the safety belt assembly “automatic locking

retractor” feature or any other safety belt function is not operating

properly when checked by an authorized dealer.

WARNING: Failure to replace the Belt and Retractor assembly

could increase the risk of injury in collisions.

123

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Seating and Safety Restraints

Safety belt pretensioner

Your vehicle is equipped with safety belt pretensioners at the driver and

front outboard passenger seating positions.

The safety belt pretensioner tightens the safety belts firmly against the

occupant’s body at the start of the crash.

WARNING: The driver and front passenger safety belt system

(including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be

replaced if the vehicle is involved in a collision that results in

deployment of front airbags, side airbags, and safety belt pretensioners.

Safety belt extension assembly

If the safety belt is too short when fully extended, there is an 8 inch

(20 cm) safety belt extension assembly that can be added (part number

611C22). This assembly can be obtained from an authorized dealer.

Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety

belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on

the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too

short for you when fully extended.

WARNING: Do not use extensions to change the fit of the

shoulder belt across the torso.

Safety belt warning light and indicator chime

The safety belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a

chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts.

124

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Seating and Safety Restraints

Conditions of operation

If...

Then...

The driver’s safety belt is not

buckled before the ignition

switch is turned to the on

position...

The safety belt warning light

illuminates 1-2 minutes and the

warning chime sounds 4-8 seconds.

The driver’s safety belt is

buckled while the indicator

light is illuminated and the

warning chime is sounding...

The driver’s safety belt is

buckled before the ignition

switch is turned to the on

position...

The safety belt warning light and

warning chime turn off.

The safety belt warning light and

indicator chime will remain off.

Belt-Minderா

The Belt-Minder௡ feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt

warning function. This feature provides additional reminders by

intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning

light in the instrument cluster when the driver’s and front passenger’s

safety belt is unbuckled.

The Belt-Minder௡ feature uses information from the front passenger

sensing system to determine if a front seat passenger is present and

therefore potentially in need of a warning. To avoid activating the

Belt-Minder௡ feature for objects placed in the front passenger seat,

warnings will only be given to large front seat occupants as determined

by the front passenger sensing system.

Both the driver’s and passenger’s safety belt usages are monitored and

either may activate the Belt-Minder௡ feature. The warnings are the same

for the driver and the front passenger. If the Belt-Minder௡ warnings have

expired (warnings for approximately five minutes) for one occupant

(driver or front passenger), the other occupant can still activate the

Belt-Minder௡ feature.

125

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Seating and Safety Restraints

If...

Then...

The driver’s and front

The Belt-Minder௡ feature will not

passenger’s safety belts are

buckled before the ignition

switch is turned to the on

position or less than

activate.

1-2 minutes have elapsed since

the ignition switch has been

turned to on...

The driver’s or front

The Belt-Minder௡ feature is activated

- the safety belt warning light

illuminates and the warning chime

sounds for six seconds every

passenger’s safety belt is not

buckled when the vehicle has

reached at least 3 mph

(5 km/h) and 1-2 minutes have 30 seconds, repeating for

elapsed since the ignition

approximately five minutes or until

switch has been turned to on... the safety belts are buckled.

The driver’s or front

passenger’s safety belt becomes - the safety belt warning light

unbuckled for approximately illuminates and the warning chime

one minute while the vehicle is sounds for six seconds every

The Belt-Minder௡ feature is activated

traveling at least 3 mph

(5 km/h) and more than

30 seconds, repeating for

approximately five minutes or until

1-2 minutes have elapsed since the safety belts are buckled.

the ignition switch has been

turned to on...

126

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Seating and Safety Restraints

The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts

(All statistics based on U.S. data):

Reasons given...

Consider...

“Crashes are rare

events”

36700 crashes occur every day. The more

we drive, the more we are exposed to “rare”

events, even for good drivers. 1 in 4 of us

will be seriously injured in a crash during

our lifetime.

“I’m not going far”

3 of 4 fatal crashes occur within 25 miles

(40 km) of home.

“Belts are

uncomfortable”

We design our safety belts to enhance

comfort. If you are uncomfortable - try

different positions for the safety belt upper

anchorage and seatback which should be as

upright as possible; this can improve comfort.

“I was in a hurry”

Prime time for an accident. Belt-Minder௡

reminds us to take a few seconds to buckle

up.

“Safety belts don’t

work”

Safety belts, when used properly, reduce

risk of death to front seat occupants by

45% in cars, and by 60% in light trucks.

“Traffic is light”

Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in

single-vehicle crashes, many when no

other vehicles are around.

“Belts wrinkle my

clothes”

Possibly, but a serious crash can do much

more than wrinkle your clothes, particularly

if you are unbelted.

“The people I’m with

don’t wear belts”

Set the example, teen deaths occur 4 times

more often in vehicles with TWO or MORE

people. Children and younger brothers/sisters

imitate behavior they see.

“I have an airbag”

Airbags offer greater protection when used

with safety belts. Frontal airbags are not

designed to inflate in rear and side crashes

or rollovers.

“I’d rather be thrown

clear”

Not a good idea. People who are ejected

are 40 times more likely to DIE. Safety

belts help prevent ejection, WE CAN’T “PICK

OUR CRASH”.

127

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Seating and Safety Restraints

WARNING: Do not sit on top of a buckled safety belt or insert a

latchplate into the buckle to avoid the Belt-Minder௡ chime. To

do so may adversely affect the performance of the vehicle’s airbag

system.

Deactivating/activating the Belt-Minderா feature

The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder௡ are

deactivated/activated independently. When deactivating/activating

one seating position, do not buckle the other position as this will

terminate the process.

Read Steps 1 - 4 thoroughly before proceeding with the

deactivation/activation programming procedure.

Note:The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder௡ features must be

disabled/enabled separately. Both cannot be disable/enabled during the

same key cycle.

The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder௡ features can be

deactivated/activated by performing the following procedure:

Before following the procedure, make sure that:

• The parking brake is set

• The gearshift is in P (Park) (automatic transmission)

• The gearshift is in neutral (manual transmission)

• The ignition switch is in the off position

• The driver and front passenger safety belts are unbuckled

WARNING: While the design allows you to deactivate your

Belt-Minder௡, this system is designed to improve your chances of

being safely belted and surviving an accident. We recommend you

leave the Belt-Minder௡ system activated for yourself and others who

may use the vehicle. To reduce the risk of injury, do not

deactivate/activate the Belt-Minder௡ feature while driving the vehicle.

128

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Seating and Safety Restraints

1. Turn the ignition switch to the on position. DO NOT START THE

ENGINE.

2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off (approximately one

minute).

• Step 3 must be completed within 30 seconds after the safety belt

warning light turns off.

3. For the seating position being disabled, buckle then unbuckle the

safety belt three times at a moderate speed, ending in the unbuckled

state. Step 3 must be completed within 30 seconds after the safety belt

warning light turns off.

• After Step 3, the restraint system warning light (airbag light) will be

turned on for three seconds.

4. Within approximately seven seconds of the light turning off, buckle

then unbuckle the safety belt.

• This will disable the Belt-Minder௡ feature for that seating position if it

is currently enabled. As confirmation, the restraint system warning

light will flash four times per second for three seconds.

• This will enable the Belt-Minder௡ feature for that seating position if it

is currently disabled. As confirmation, the restraint system warning

light will flash four times per second for three seconds, followed by

three seconds with the light off, then followed by the restraint system

warning light flashing four times per second for three seconds again.

AIRBAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)

129

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Seating and Safety Restraints

Important SRS precautions

The SRS is designed to work with

the safety belt to help protect the

driver and right front passenger

from certain upper body injuries.

Airbags DO NOT inflate slowly;

there is a risk of injury from a

deploying airbag.

WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver,

should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an air

bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.

WARNING: When possible, all children 12 years old and under

should be properly restrained in a rear seating position.

WARNING: The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration

(NHTSA) recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 inches

(25 cm) between an occupant’s chest and the driver airbag module.

WARNING: Never place your arm over the airbag module as a

deploying airbag can result in serious arm fractures or other

injuries.

To properly position yourself away from the airbag:

• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the

pedals comfortably.

• Recline the seat slightly one or two degrees from the upright position.

WARNING: Do not put anything on or over the airbag module.

Placing objects on or over the airbag inflation area may cause

those objects to be propelled by the airbag into your face and torso

causing serious injury.

130

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Seating and Safety Restraints

WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the

airbag supplemental restraint systems or its fuses. Contact your

authorized dealer as soon as possible.

WARNING: Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of

the vehicle (including frame, bumper, front end body structure

and tow hooks) may affect the performance of the airbag system,

increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify the front end of the

vehicle.

Children and airbags

Children must always be properly

restrained. Accident statistics

suggest that children are safer when

properly restrained in the rear

seating positions than in the front

seating position. Failure to follow

these instructions may increase the

risk of injury in a collision.

WARNING: Airbags can kill

or injure a child in a child

seat. NEVER place a rear-facing

child seat in front of an active

airbag. If you must use a

forward-facing child seat in the

front seat, move the seat all the

way back.

131

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Seating and Safety Restraints

How does the airbag supplemental restraint system work?

The airbag SRS is designed to

activate when the vehicle sustains a

longitudinal deceleration sufficient

to cause the airbag sensors to close

an electrical circuit that initiates

airbag inflation. The fact that the

airbags did not inflate in a collision

does not mean that something is

wrong with the system. Rather, it

means the forces were not sufficient

enough to cause activation. Airbags

are designed to inflate in frontal and

near-frontal collisions, not rollover, side-impact, or rear-impacts unless

the collision causes sufficient longitudinal deceleration.

The airbags inflate and deflate

rapidly upon activation. After airbag

deployment, it is normal to notice a

smoke-like, powdery residue or

smell the burnt propellant. This may

consist of cornstarch, talcum

powder or sodium compounds which

may irritate the skin and eyes, but

none of the residue is toxic.

While the SRS is designed to help

reduce serious injuries, contact with

a deploying airbag may also cause

abrasions, swelling or temporary

hearing loss. Because airbags must

inflate rapidly and with considerable

force, there is the risk of death or

serious injuries such as fractures, facial and eye injuries or internal

injuries, particularly to occupants who are not properly restrained or are

otherwise out of position at the time of airbag deployment. It is

extremely important that occupants be properly restrained as far away

from the airbag module as possible while maintaining vehicle control.

The SRS consists of:

• Driver and passenger airbag modules (which include the inflators and

airbags)

• seat-mounted side airbags

132

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Seating and Safety Restraints

• one or more impact and safing sensors

• a readiness light and tone

• a diagnostic module

• and the electrical wiring which connects the components

• front safety belt pretensioner

• front passenger sensing system. Refer to Front passenger sensing

system later in this chapter.

• “passenger airbag off” or “pass airbag off” indicator lamp. Refer to

Front passenger sensing system later in this chapter.

The diagnostic module monitors its own internal circuits and the

supplemental airbag electrical system wiring (including the impact

sensors), the system wiring, the airbag system readiness light, the airbag

back up power and the airbag ignitors.

WARNING: Several air bag system components get hot after

inflation. Do not touch them after inflation.

WARNING: If the air bag has deployed, the air bag will not

function again and must be replaced immediately. If the air

bag is not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury

in a collision.

Front passenger sensing system

The front passenger sensing system is designed to meet the regulatory

requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) 208

and is designed to disable (will not inflate) the front passenger’s frontal

airbag under certain conditions.

The front passenger sensing system works with sensors that are part of

the front passenger’s seat and safety belt. The sensors are designed to

detect the presence of a properly seated occupant and determine if the

front passenger’s frontal airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or

disabled (will not inflate).

The front passenger sensing system will disable (will not inflate) the

front passenger’s frontal airbag if:

• the front passenger seat is unoccupied, or has small/medium objects in

the front seat,

• the system determines that an infant is present in a rear-facing infant

seat that is installed according to the manufacturer’s instructions,

133

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Seating and Safety Restraints

• the system determines that a small child is present in a forward-facing

child restraint that is installed according to the manufacturer’s

instructions,

• the system determines that a small child is present in a booster seat,

• a front passenger takes his/her weight off of the seat for a period of

time,

• a child or a small person occupies the front passenger seat.

When the passenger airbag off light is illuminated, the passenger side

airbag may be disabled to avoid the risk of airbag deployment injuries.

The front passenger sensing system

uses a Љpassenger airbag offЉ or

Љpass airbag offЉ indicator which will

illuminate and stay lit to remind you

that the front passenger frontal

airbag is disabled. The indicator

lamp is located on the front edge of the map lamps.

Note: The indicator lamp will illuminate for a short period of time when

the ignition is turned to the on position to confirm it is functional.

When the front passenger seat is not occupied (empty seat) or in the

event that the front passenger frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate), the

indicator lamp will be unlit.

The front passenger sensing system is designed to disable (will not

inflate) the front passenger’s frontal airbag when a rear facing infant

seat, a forward-facing child restraint, or a booster seat is detected.

• When the front passenger sensing system disables (will not inflate)

the front passenger frontal airbag, the indicator lamp will illuminate

and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal airbag is

disabled.

• If the child restraint has been installed and the indicator lamp is not

lit, then turn the vehicle off, remove the child restraint from the

vehicle and reinstall the restraint following the child restraint

manufacturer’s instructions.

The front passenger sensing system is designed to enable (may inflate)

the front passenger’s frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a

person of adult size is sitting properly in the front passenger seat.

• When the front passenger sensing system enables the front passenger

frontal airbag (may inflate), the indicator will be unlit and stay unlit.

If a person of adult size is sitting in the front passenger’s seat, but the

Љpassenger airbag offЉ or Љpass airbag offЉ indicator lamp is lit, it is

possible that the person isn’t sitting properly in the seat. If this happens:

134

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Seating and Safety Restraints

• Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to place the seatback in the

full upright position.

• Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion,

with the person’s legs comfortably extended.

• Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for

about two minutes. This will allow the system to detect that person

and enable the passenger’s frontal airbag.

• If the indicator lamp remains lit even after this, the person should be

advised to ride in the rear seat.

Pass Airbag Off

Indicator Lamp

Occupant

Passenger Airbag

Empty seat

Small child in child

safety seat or booster

Unlit

Lit

Disabled

Small child with safety Lit

belt buckled or

Disabled

unbuckled

Adult

Unlit

Enabled

WARNING: Even with Advanced Restraints Systems, children

12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating

position.

After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts, it’s

very important that they continue to sit properly. A properly seated

occupant sits upright, leaning against the seat back, and centered on the

seat cushion, with their feet comfortably extended on the floor. Sitting

improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event. For

example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward,

leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of

injury during a crash is greatly increased.

WARNING: Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat

back reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion

and affect the decision of the front passenger sensing system, resulting

in serious injury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright against your seatback, with your feet on the floor.

The front passenger sensing system may detect small or medium objects

placed on the seat cushion. For most objects that are in the front

135

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Seating and Safety Restraints

passenger seat, the passenger airbag will be disabled. Even though the

passenger airbag is disabled, the Љpass airbag offЉ lamp may or may not

be illuminated according to the table below.

Pass Airbag Off

Indicator Lamp

Objects

Passenger Airbag

Small (i.e. three-ring

binder, small purse,

bottled water)

Unlit

Disabled

Medium (i.e. heavy

briefcase, fully packed

luggage)

Empty seat, or small

to medium object with

safety belt buckled

Lit

Disabled

If you think that the status of the passenger airbag off indicator lamp is

incorrect, check for the following:

• Objects lodged underneath the seat

• Objects between the seat cushion and the center console (if

equipped)

• Objects hanging off the seat back

• Objects stowed in the seatback map pocket (if equipped)

• Objects placed on the occupant’s lap

• Cargo interference with the seat

• Other passengers pushing or pulling on the seat

• Rear passenger feet and knees resting or pushing on the seat

The conditions listed above may cause the weight of a properly seated

occupant to be incorrectly interpreted by the front passenger sensing

system. The person in the front passenger seat may appear heavier or

lighter due to the conditions described in the list above.

WARNING: To reduce the risk of possible serious injury:

Do not stow objects in seat back map pocket (if equipped) or

hang objects off seat back if a child is in the front passenger seat.

Do not place objects underneath the front passenger seat or between

the seat and the center console (if equipped).

Check the “passenger airbag off” or “pass airbag off” indicator lamp for

proper airbag status.

Failure to follow these instructions may interfere with the front

passenger seat sensing system.

136

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Seating and Safety Restraints

In case there is a problem with the

front passenger sensing system, the

airbag readiness lamp in the

instrument cluster will stay lit.

If the airbag readiness lamp is lit, do the following:

The driver and/or adult passengers should check for any objects that

may be lodged underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering

with the seat.

If objects are lodged and/or cargo is interfering with the seat; please take

the following steps to remove the obstruction:

• Pull the vehicle over.

• Turn the vehicle off.

• Driver and/or adult passengers should check for any objects lodged

underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering with the seat.

• Remove the obstruction(s) (if found).

• Restart the vehicle.

• Wait at least two minutes and verify that the airbag readiness light is

no longer illuminated

• If the airbag readiness lamp remains illuminated, this may or may/not

be a problem due to the front passenger sensing system.

DO NOT attempt to repair or service the system; take your vehicle

immediately to an authorized dealer.

If it is necessary to modify an advanced front airbag system to

accommodate a person with disabilities, contact the Ford Customer

Relationship Center at the phone number shown in the Customer

Assistance section of this owner’s guide.

WARNING: Any alteration/modification to the front passenger

seat may affect the performance of the front passenger sensing

system.

Seat-mounted side airbag system

WARNING: Do not place objects or mount equipment on or

near the airbag cover on the side of the seatbacks of the front

seats or in front seat areas that may come into contact with a

deploying airbag. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the

risk of personal injury in the event of a collision.

137

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Seating and Safety Restraints

WARNING: Do not use accessory seat covers. The use of

accessory seat covers may prevent the deployment of the side

airbags and increase the risk of injury in an accident.

WARNING: Do not lean your head on the door. The side airbag

could injure you as it deploys from the side of the seatback.

WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the

airbag SRS, its fuses or the seat cover on a seat containing an

airbag. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.

WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle should always wear

their safety belts even when an airbag SRS is provided.

How does the side airbag system work?

The design and development of the side airbag system included

recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of

automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working

Group. These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of

injuries related to the deployment of side airbags.

The side airbag system consists of

the following:

• An inflatable bag (airbag) with a

gas generator concealed behind

the outboard bolster of the driver

and front passenger seatbacks.

• A special seat cover designed to

allow airbag deployment.

• The same warning light,

electronic control and diagnostic

unit as used for the front airbags.

• Two crash sensors located under

the outboard side of the front

seats, attached to the floor.

Side airbags, in combination with

safety belts, can help reduce the

risk of severe injuries in the event of a significant side impact collision.

138

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Seating and Safety Restraints

The side airbags are fitted on the outboard side of the seatbacks of the

front seats. In certain lateral collisions, the airbag on the side affected by

the collision will be inflated. The airbag was designed to inflate between

the door panel and occupant to further enhance the protection provided

to occupants in side impact collisions.

The airbag SRS is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains lateral

deceleration sufficient to cause the sensors to initiate airbag inflation.

The fact that the airbags did not inflate in a collision does not mean that

something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the forces were

not of the type sufficient to cause activation. Side airbags are designed

to inflate in side-impact collisions, not roll-over, rear-impact, frontal or

near-frontal collisions, unless the collision causes sufficient lateral

deceleration.

WARNING: Several air bag system components get hot after

inflation. Do not touch them after inflation.

WARNING: If the side

airbag has deployed, the

airbag will not function again.

The side airbag system

(including the seat) must be

inspected and serviced by an

authorized dealer . If the airbag

is not replaced, the unrepaired

area will increase the risk of injury

in a collision.

Determining if the system is operational

The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to

indicate the condition of the system. Refer to the Warning lights and

chimes section in the Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance

of the airbag is not required.

139

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Seating and Safety Restraints

A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:

• The readiness light will either

flash or stay lit.

• The readiness light will not

illuminate immediately after

ignition is turned on.

• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat

periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired.

If any of these things happen, even intermittently, contact your

authorized dealer as soon as possible. Unless serviced, the system may

not function properly in the event of a collision.

SOS Post-Crash Alert System™

The system automatically flashes the turn signal lamps and sounds the

horn three times at four second intervals in the event of a serious impact

that deploys an airbag (front, side, side curtain or Safety Canopy௡) or

the safety belt pretensioners.

The system can be turned off when any one of the following actions are

taken by the driver or any other person:

• pressing the hazard control button,

• or pressing the panic button on the remote entry transmitter.

The feature will continue to operate until the vehicle runs out of power.

Disposal of airbags and airbag equipped vehicles

See authorized dealer. Airbags MUST BE disposed of by qualified

personnel.

SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN

See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety

restraints for children. Also see Airbag supplemental restraint system

(SRS) in this chapter for special instructions about using airbags.

140

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Seating and Safety Restraints

Important child restraint precautions

WARNING: Always make sure your child is secured properly in

a device that is appropriate for their height, age and weight.

Child safety restraints must be purchased separately from the vehicle.

Failure to follow these instructions and guidelines may result in an

increased risk of serious injury or death to your child.

WARNING: All children are shaped differently. The

Recommendations for Safety Restraints are based on probable

child height, age and weight thresholds from NHTSA and other safety

organizations or are the minimum requirements of law. Ford

recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety

Technician (CPST) and consult your pediatrician to make sure your

child seat is appropriate for your child, and is compatible with and

properly installed in the vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting station

and CPST contact the NHTSA toll free at 1-888-327-4236 or on the

internet at http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, check with your local

St. John Ambulance office for referral to a CPST or for further

information, contact your provincial ministry of transportation, your

local St. John Ambulance office at http://www.sfa.ca, or Transport

Canada at 1–800–333–0371 (http://www.tc.gc.ca). Failure to properly

restrain children in safety seats made especially for their height, age,

and weight may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to

your child.

141

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Seating and Safety Restraints

Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children

Recommended

Child size, height, weight, or age

restraint type

Infants or Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or

Use a child safety

toddlers less (generally age four or younger) seat (sometimes

called an infant

carrier, convertible

seat, or toddler seat).

Small

Children who have outgrown or no

Use a belt-positioning

booster seat.

children longer properly fit in a child safety

seat (generally children who are less

than 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters)

tall, are greater than age four (4)

and less than age twelve (12), and

between 40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb

(36 kg) and upward to 100 lb

(45 kg) if recommended by your

child restraint manufacturer)

Larger

Children who have outgrown or no

Use a vehicle safety

belt having the lap

belt snug and low

children longer properly fit in a

belt-positioning booster seat

(generally children who are at least across the hips,

4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall or shoulder belt

greater than 80 lb (36 kg) or 100 lb centered across the

(45 kg) if recommended by child

restraint manufacturer)

shoulder and chest,

and seatback upright.

• You are required by law to properly use safety seats for infants and

toddlers in the U.S. and Canada.

• Many states and provinces require that small children use approved

booster seats until they reach age eight, a height of 4 ft 9 in.

(1.45 meters) tall, or 80 lb (36 kg). Check your local and state or

provincial laws for specific requirements regarding the safety of

children in your vehicle.

• When possible, always properly restrain children twelve (12) years of

age and under in a rear seating position of your vehicle. Accident

statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in

the rear seating positions than in a front seating position.

142

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Seating and Safety Restraints

Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children

Use any attachment method as indicated

below by “X”

LATCH LATCH Safety Safety

(lower (lower belt belt and belt

anchors anchors and

Safety

Restraint Child

LATCH

(lower

only

Type

Weight

and

only)

top

tether

anchor)

tether anchors

anchor and top

tether

anchor)

Rear

facing

Up to

48 lb

child seat (21 kg)

Forward Up to

facing

child seat (21 kg)

Forward Over

facing

48 lb

child seat (21 kg)

WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.

NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag.

If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the

vehicle seat all the way back. When possible, all children age 12 and

under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position. If all

children cannot be seated and restrained properly in a rear seating

position, properly restrain the largest child in the front seat.

143

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Seating and Safety Restraints

WARNING: Always carefully follow the instructions and

warnings provided by the manufacturer of any child restraint to

determine if the restraint device is appropriate for your child’s size,

height, weight, or age. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions and warnings provided for installation and use in

conjunction with the instructions and warnings provided by the vehicle

manufacturer. A safety seat that is improperly installed or utilized, is

inappropriate for your child’s height, age, or weight or does not

properly fit the child may increase the risk of serious injury or death.

WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap

while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the

child from injury in a collision, which may result in serious injury or

death.

WARNING: Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost a child.

They can slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or

death in a collision.

WARNING: Always restrain an unoccupied child seat or booster

seat. These objects may become projectiles in a collision or

sudden stop, which may increase the risk of serious injury.

WARNING: Never place, or allow a child to place, the shoulder

belt under a child’s arm or behind the back because it reduces

the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk

of injury or death in a collision.

WARNING: Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets

unattended in your vehicle.

Transporting children

Always make sure your child is secured properly in a device that is

appropriate for their age, height and weight. All children are shaped

differently. The child height, age and weight thresholds provided are

recommendations or the minimum requirements of law. The National

Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) provides education and

144

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Seating and Safety Restraints

training to ensure that all children ages 0 to 16 are properly restrained in

the correct restraint system. Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA

Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician (CPST) and your

pediatrician to make sure your seat is appropriate for your child and

properly installed in the vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting station and

CPST contact the NHTSA toll free at 1-888-327-4236 or on the internet

at http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, check with your local St. John

Ambulance office for referral to a CPST or for further information,

contact your provincial ministry of transportation, your local St. John

Ambulance office at http://www.sfa.ca, or Transport Canada at

1–800–333–0371 (http://www.tc.gc.ca).

Follow all the safety restraint and airbag precautions that apply to adult

passengers in your vehicle.

If the child is the proper height, age, and weight (as specified by your

child safety seat or booster manufacturer), fits the restraint and can be

restrained properly, then restrain the child in the child safety seat or

with the belt-positioning booster. Remember that child seats and

belt-positioning boosters vary and may be designed to fit children of

different heights, ages and weights. Children who are too large for child

safety seats or belt-positioning boosters (as specified by your child safety

seat manufacturer) should always properly wear safety belts.

SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN

Infant and/or toddler seats

Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the

child.

When installing a child safety seat:

• Review and follow the information

presented in the Airbag

supplemental restraint system

(SRS) section in this chapter.

• Carefully follow all of the

manufacturer’s instructions

included with the safety seat you

put in your vehicle. If you do not

install and use the safety seat

properly, the child may be injured

in a sudden stop or collision.

145

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Seating and Safety Restraints

Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. NEVER place a

rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If you must use a

forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the vehicle seat all the

way back.

Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating

position whenever possible. If all children cannot be seated and

restrained properly in a rear seating position, properly restrain the

largest child in the front seat.

Installing child safety seats with combination lap and shoulder

belts

Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use.

Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating

position whenever possible. If all children cannot be seated and

restrained properly in a rear seating position, properly restrain the

largest child in the front seat.

When installing a child safety seat with combination lap/shoulder belts:

• Use the correct safety belt buckle for that seating position.

• Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap

and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the

buckle.

• Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety

seat, with the tongue between the child seat and the release button,

to prevent accidental unbuckling.

• Place vehicle seat back in upright position.

• Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode. Refer to Step 5

below. This vehicle does not require the use of a locking clip.

WARNING: Depending on where you secure a child restraint,

and depending on the child restraint design, you may block

access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies and/or LATCH lower

anchors, rendering those features potentially unusable. To avoid risk of

injury, occupants should only use seating positions where they are able

to be properly restrained.

Perform the following steps when installing the child seat with

combination lap/shoulder belts:

Note: Although the child seat illustrated is a forward facing child seat,

the steps are the same for installing a rear facing child seat.

146

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Seating and Safety Restraints

1. Position the child safety seat in a

seat with a combination lap and

shoulder belt.

2. Pull down on the shoulder belt

and then grasp the shoulder belt

and lap belt together.

3. While holding the shoulder and

lap belt portions together, route the

tongue through the child seat

according to the child seat

manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure

the belt webbing is not twisted.

147

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Seating and Safety Restraints

4. Insert the belt tongue into the

proper buckle (the buckle closest to

the direction the tongue is coming

from) for that seating position until

you hear a snap and feel the latch

engage. Make sure the tongue is

latched securely by pulling on it.

5. To put the retractor in the

automatic locking mode, grasp the

shoulder portion of the belt and pull

downward until all of the belt is

pulled out.

6. Allow the belt to retract to remove slack. The belt will click as it

retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode.

7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is

in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt

out). If the retractor is not locked, repeat Steps 5 and 6.

8. Remove remaining slack from the

belt. Force the seat down with extra

weight, e.g., by pressing down or

kneeling on the child restraint while

pulling up on the shoulder belt in

order to force slack from the belt.

This is necessary to remove the

remaining slack that will exist once

the additional weight of the child is

added to the child restraint. It also

helps to achieve the proper

snugness of the child seat to the

vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean

148

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Seating and Safety Restraints

towards the buckle will additionally help to remove remaining slack from

the belt.

9. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat is equipped). Refer to

Attaching child safety seats with tether straps later in this chapter.

10. Before placing the child in the

seat, forcibly move the seat forward

and back to make sure the seat is

securely held in place. To check

this, grab the seat at the belt path

and attempt to move it side to side

and forward and back. There should

be no more than one inch (2.5 cm)

of movement for proper installation.

Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger

Safety Technician (CPST) to make certain the child restraint is properly

installed. In Canada, check with your local St. John Ambulance office for

referral to a CPST.

Attaching child safety seats with LATCH (Lower Anchors and

Tethers for CHildren) attachments

The LATCH system is composed of three vehicle anchor points: two (2)

lower anchors located where the vehicle seat back and seat cushion meet

(called the “seat bight”) and one (1) top tether anchor located behind

that seating position.

LATCH compatible child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted

attachments that connect to the two lower anchors at the LATCH

equipped seating positions in your vehicle. This type of attachment

method eliminates the need to use safety belts to attach the child seat,

however the safety belt can still be used to attach the child seat. For

forward-facing child seats, the top tether strap must also be attached to

the proper top tether anchor, if a top tether strap has been provided

with your child seat. Ford Motor Company recommends the use of a

child safety seat having a top tether strap. See Attaching child safety

seats with tether straps and Recommendations for attaching child

safety restraints for children in this chapter for more information.

149

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Seating and Safety Restraints

Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for child seat installation at the

seating positions marked with the child seat symbol.

The LATCH anchors are located at

the rear section of the rear seat

between the cushion and seat back,

below the locator symbols on the

seat back. Follow the child seat

manufacturer’s instructions to

properly install a child seat with

LATCH attachments.

Follow the instructions on attaching

child safety seats with tether straps.

Refer to Attaching child safety

seats with tether straps later in this

chapter.

Attach LATCH lower attachments of

the child seat only to the anchors

shown.

WARNING: The center of the rear seat is NOT designed as a

seating position and is not equipped with safety belts. The

LATCH anchors were not designed to be used with a child seat in the

center position and there is no tether anchor available at the center.

Attempted use of the center as a seating position will increase the risk

of injury or death in the event of a collision.

WARNING: Never attach two child safety seats to the same

anchor. In a crash, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold

two child safety seat attachments and may break, causing serious

injury or death.

If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH attachments, and have

attached the top tether strap to the proper top tether anchor, do not

tighten the tether strap enough to lift the child seat off the vehicle seat

cushion when the child is seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug

without lifting the front of the child seat. Keeping the child seat just

touching the vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash.

150

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Seating and Safety Restraints

Each time you use the safety seat, check that the seat is properly

attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor, if applicable. Tug the

child seat from side to side and forward and back where it is secured to

the vehicle. The seat should move less than one inch when you do this

for a proper installation.

If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being

injured in a crash greatly increases.

Combining safety belt and LATCH lower anchors for attaching

child safety seats

When used in combination, either the safety belt or the LATCH lower

anchors may be attached first, provided a proper installation is achieved.

Attach the tether strap afterward, if included with the child seat. Refer

to Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children

in this chapter.

Attaching child safety seats with tether straps

Many forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap which

extends from the back of the child safety seat and hooks to an anchoring

point called the top tether anchor. Tether straps are available as an

accessory for many older safety seats. Contact the manufacturer of your

child seat for information about ordering a tether strap, or to obtain a

longer tether strap if the tether strap on your safety seat does not reach

the appropriate top tether anchor in the vehicle.

The rear seats of your vehicle are equipped with built-in tether strap

anchors located behind the seats and below the rear window behind the

speakers (coupe) or rearward of the seatback in the convertible top sling

(convertible).

The tether anchors in your vehicle are either located under a cover

marked with the child tether anchor symbol (shown with title) or are

under a tag marked with the child tether anchor symbol in the

convertible top sling.

151

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Seating and Safety Restraints

The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the following positions

(shown from top view):

Attach the tether strap only to the

appropriate tether anchor as shown.

The tether strap may not work

properly if attached somewhere

other than the correct tether

anchor.

Once the child safety seat has been

installed, using either the safety

belt, the lower anchors of the LATCH system, or both, you can attach

the top tether strap.

Perform the following steps to attach a child safety seat to the tether

anchor:

For Coupe only:

1. Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat.

For vehicles with adjustable head restraints, route the tether strap under

the head restraint and between the head restraint posts, otherwise route

the tether strap over the top of the seatback.

2. Locate the correct anchor for the

selected seating position.

152

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Seating and Safety Restraints

3. Open the tether anchor cover.

4. Clip the tether strap to the

anchor as shown.

If the tether strap is clipped

incorrectly, the child safety seat may

not be retained properly in the

event of a collision.

5. Tighten the child safety seat

tether strap according to the

manufacturer’s instructions.

If the safety seat is not anchored

properly, the risk of a child being

injured in a collision greatly

increases.

For Convertible only:

1. Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat.

For vehicles with adjustable head restraints, route the tether strap under

the head restraint and between the head restraint posts, otherwise route

the tether strap over the top of the seatback.

153

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Seating and Safety Restraints

The tether anchors on the

convertible are located rearward of

the seatback in the convertible top

sling.

Note: For easier access, attach the

tether with the convertible top up.

Note: The attachments for the

convertible boot located on the back

of the head restraints are not tether

anchors.

154

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Seating and Safety Restraints

2. Access tether anchors located

behind the seatback under the vinyl

tag marked with the child tether

anchor symbol.

3. Clip the tether strap to the

anchor as shown.

If the tether strap is clipped

incorrectly, the child safety seat may

not be retained properly in the

event of a collision.

4. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the

manufacturer’s instructions.

If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being

injured in a collision greatly increases.

If your child restraint system is equipped with a tether strap, and the

child restraint manufacturer recommends its use, Ford also recommends

its use.

155

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Seating and Safety Restraints

Child booster seats

The belt-positioning booster (booster seat) is used to improve the fit of

the vehicle safety belt. Children outgrow a typical child seat (e.g.,

convertible or toddler seat) when they weigh about 40 lb (18 kg) and are

around four (4) years of age. Consult your child safety seat owner guide

for the weight, height, and age limits specific to your child safety seat.

Keep your child in the child safety seat if it properly fits the child,

remains appropriate for their weight, height and age AND if properly

secured to the vehicle.

Although the lap/shoulder belt will provide some protection, children

who have outgrown a typical child seat are still too small for lap/shoulder

belts to fit properly, and wearing an improperly fitted vehicle safety belt

could increase the risk of serious injury in a crash. To improve the fit of

both the lap and shoulder belt on children who have outgrown child

safety seats, Ford Motor Company recommends use of a belt-positioning

booster.

Booster seats position a child so that vehicle lap/shoulder safety belts fit

better. They lift the child up so that the lap belt rests low across the hips

and the knees bend comfortably at the edge of the cushion, while

minimizing slouching. Booster seats may also make the shoulder belt fit

better and more comfortably. Try to keep the belt near the middle of the

shoulder and across the center of the chest. Moving the child closer (a

few centimeters or inches) to the center of the vehicle, but remaining in

the same seating position, may help provide a good shoulder belt fit.

When children should use booster seats

Children need to use booster seats from the time they outgrow the

toddler seat until they are big enough for the vehicle seat and

lap/shoulder belt to fit properly. Generally this is when they reach a

height of at least 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall (around age eight to

age twelve and between 40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) or upward to

100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by your child restraint manufacturer).

Many state and provincial laws require that children use approved

booster seats until they reach age eight, a height of 4 feet 9 inches

(1.45 meters) tall, or 80 lb (36 kg).

156

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Seating and Safety Restraints

Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these

questions when seated without a booster seat:

• Can the child sit all the way back

against the vehicle seat back with

knees bent comfortably at the

edge of the seat cushion?

• Can the child sit without

slouching?

• Does the lap belt rest low across

the hips?

• Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest?

• Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?

Types of booster seats

There are generally two types of belt-positioning booster seats: backless

and high back. Always use booster seats in conjunction with the vehicle

lap/shoulder belt.

• Backless booster seats

If your backless booster seat has a

removable shield, remove the

shield. If a vehicle seating position

has a low seat back or no head

restraint, a backless booster seat

may place your child’s head (as

measured at the tops of the ears)

above the top of the seat. In this

case, move the backless booster

to another seating position with a

higher seat back or head restraint and lap/shoulder belts, or consider

using a high back booster seat.

• High back booster seats

If, with a backless booster seat,

you cannot find a seating position

that adequately supports your

child’s head, a high back booster

seat would be a better choice.

157

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Seating and Safety Restraints

Children and booster seats vary in size and shape. Choose a booster that

keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips, never up across the

stomach, and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest and

rest snugly near the center of the shoulder. The drawings below compare

the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt uncomfortably close to the neck

and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder. The drawings below

also show how the lap belt should be low and snug across the child’s

hips.

If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat, placing a rubberized mesh

sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this

condition. Do not introduce any item thicker than this under the booster

seat. Check with the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions.

158

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Seating and Safety Restraints

The importance of shoulder belts

Using a booster without a shoulder belt increases the risk of a child’s

head hitting a hard surface in a collision. For this reason, you should

never use a booster seat with a lap belt only. It is generally best to use a

booster seat with lap/shoulder belts in the back seat.

Move a child to a different seating location if the shoulder belt does not

stay positioned on the shoulder during use.

Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the booster seat.

WARNING: Never place, or allow a child to place, the shoulder

belt under a child’s arm or behind the back because it reduces

the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk

of injury or death in a collision.

Child restraint and safety belt maintenance

Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child safety seat systems periodically

to make sure they work properly and are not damaged. Inspect the

vehicle and child seat safety belts to make sure there are no nicks, tears

or cuts. Replace if necessary. All vehicle safety belt assemblies, including

retractors, buckles, front safety belt buckle assemblies, buckle support

assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder belt height adjusters (if

equipped), shoulder belt guide on seatback (if equipped), child safety

seat LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching hardware, should be

inspected after a collision. Refer to the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for additional inspection and maintenance information

specific to the child restraint. Ford Motor Company recommends that all

safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a collision be

replaced. However, if the collision was minor and an authorized dealer

finds that the belts do not show damage and continue to operate

properly, they do not need to be replaced. Safety belt assemblies not in

use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either

damage or improper operation is noted.

For proper care of soiled safety belts, refer to Interior in the Cleaning

chapter.

WARNING: Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the

safety belt assembly or child restraint system under the above

conditions could result in severe personal injuries in the event of a

collision.

159

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tires, Wheels and Loading

INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

Tire Quality Grades apply to new

pneumatic passenger car tires. The

Quality grades can be found where

applicable on the tire sidewall

between tread shoulder and

maximum section width. For

example:

• Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United

States Department of Transportation has set.

Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires. They do

not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver or

temporary use spare tires, light truck or “LT” type tires, tires with

nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as

defined in Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2).

U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U.S.

Department of Transportation requires Ford Motor Company to give you

the following information about tire grades exactly as the government

has written it.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of

the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified

government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one

and one-half (1¹⁄2) times as well on the government course as a tire

graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual

conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the

norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and

differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA A B C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The

grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured

under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of

asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction

performance.

160

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tires, Wheels and Loading

WARNING: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on

straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include

acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature A B C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the

tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat

when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory

test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire

to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to

sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance

which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standard No. 139. Grades B and A represent higher levels of

performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by

law.

WARNING: The temperature grade for this tire is established

for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive

speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in

combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

TIRES

Tires are designed to give many thousands of miles of service, but they

must be maintained in order to get the maximum benefit from them.

Glossary of tire terminology

• Tire label: A label showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire sizes,

recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle

can carry.

• Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of

each tire providing information about the tire brand and

manufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacture. Also referred

to as DOT code.

• Inflation pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire.

• Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a

maximum load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires]. Increasing

the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’s

load carrying capability.

161

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tires, Wheels and Loading

• Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a

heavier maximum load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric tires].

Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase

the tire’s load carrying capability.

• kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure.

• PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure.

• Cold inflation pressure: The tire pressure when the vehicle has

been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and

prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile (1.6 km).

• Recommended inflation pressure: The cold inflation pressure found

on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label located on

the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.

• B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the

front door.

• Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next to the rim.

• Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead area and the tread.

• Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that

contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle.

• Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly

upon which the tire beads are seated.

INFLATING YOUR TIRES

Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly

inflated. Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure

without appearing flat.

Every day before you drive, check your tires. If one looks lower than the

others, use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and adjust if

required.

At least once a month and before long trips, inspect each tire and check

the tire pressure with a tire gauge (including spare, if equipped). Inflate

all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Ford Motor Company.

You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as automatic

service station gauges may be inaccurate. Ford recommends the use of a

digital or dial-type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick-type tire

pressure gauge.

Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire

performance and wear. Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause

uneven treadwear patterns.

162

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tires, Wheels and Loading

WARNING: Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire

failures and may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation

or ЉblowoutЉ, with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk

of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling

resistance, resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire. It

also may result in unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of

vehicle control and accidents. A tire can lose up to half of its air

pressure and not appear to be flat!

Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure

even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found

on the tire. The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is found on

the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located

on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. Failure to follow the tire

pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and

adversely affect the way your vehicle handles.

Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure is the tire manufacturer’s

maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at which the

maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally

higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation pressure

which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire

Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.

The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the

recommended pressure on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or

Tire Label.

When weather temperature changes occur, tire inflation pressures also

change. A 10°F (6°C) temperature drop can cause a corresponding drop

of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your tire pressures

frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found

on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label.

To check the pressure in your tire(s):

1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning they are not hot from driving

even a mile.

If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot, (i.e. driven more

than 1 mile [1.6 km]), never “bleed” or reduce air pressure. The tires are

hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above

recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended cold

inflation pressure could be significantly under-inflated.

163

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tires, Wheels and Loading

Note: If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire(s), check

and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure

when you get to the pump. It is normal for tires to heat up and the air

pressure inside to go up as you drive.

2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, then firmly press the tire

gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure.

3. Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure.

Note: If you overfill the tire, release air by pressing on the metal stem in

the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge.

4. Replace the valve cap.

5. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare.

Note: Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the

other tires. For T-type/mini-spare tires (see the Dissimilar spare

tire/wheel information section for description): Store and maintain at

60 psi (4.15 bar). For Full Size and Dissimilar spare tires (see the

Dissimilar spare tire/wheel information section for description): Store

and maintain at the higher of the front and rear inflation pressure as

shown on the Tire Label.

6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other

objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air

leak.

7. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts or bulges.

TIRE CARE

Inspecting your tires and wheel valve stems

Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and

remove objects such as stones, nails or glass that may be wedged in the

tread grooves. Check the tire and valve stems for holes, cracks, or cuts

that may permit air leakage and repair or replace the tire and replace

the valve stem. Inspect the tire sidewalls for cracking, cuts, bruises and

other signs of damage or excessive wear. If internal damage to the tire is

suspected, have the tire demounted and inspected in case it needs to be

repaired or replaced. For your safety, tires that are damaged or show

signs of excessive wear should not be used because they are more likely

to blow out or fail.

164

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tires, Wheels and Loading

Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear

abnormally. Inspect all your tires, including the spare, frequently, and

replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist:

Tire wear

When the tread is worn down to

1/16th of an inch (2 mm), tires must

be replaced to help prevent your

vehicle from skidding and

hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear

indicators, or “wear bars”, which

look like narrow strips of smooth

rubber across the tread will appear

on the tire when the tread is worn

down to 1/16th of an inch (2 mm).

When the tire tread wears down to

the same height as these “wear bars”, the tire is worn out and must be

replaced.

Damage

Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage (such as

bulges in the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the tread groove and

separation in the tread or sidewall). If damage is observed or suspected

have the tire inspected by a tire professional. Tires can be damaged

during off-road use, so inspection after off-road use is also

recommended.

WARNING: Age

Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as

weather, storage conditions, and conditions of use (load, speed,

inflation pressure, etc.) the tires experience throughout their lives.

In general, tires should be replaced after six years regardless of tread

wear. However, heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading

conditions can accelerate the aging process and may require tires to be

replaced more frequently.

You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road tires or

after six years due to aging even if it has not been used.

165

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tires, Wheels and Loading

U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN)

Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to

place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This

information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of

the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for

safety standard certification and in case of a recall.

This begins with the letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all

federal standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code

designating where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size

code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was

built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After

2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th

week of 2001. The numbers in between are identification codes used for

traceability. This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect

requires a recall.

Tire replacement requirements

Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and

handling capability.

WARNING: Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the

same size, load index, speed rating and type (such as P-metric

versus LT-metric or all-season versus all-terrain) as those originally

provided by Ford. The recommended tire and wheel size may be found

on either the Safety Compliance Certification Label or the Tire Label

which is located on the B-Pillar or edge of the driver’s door. If this

information is not found on these labels then you should contact your

authorized dealer as soon as possible. Use of any tire or wheel not

recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your

vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle

control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. Additionally the use

of non-recommended tires and wheels could cause steering,

suspension, axle or transfer case/power transfer unit failure. If you

have questions regarding tire replacement, contact your authorized

dealer as soon as possible.

166

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tires, Wheels and Loading

WARNING: When mounting replacement tires and wheels, you

should not exceed the maximum pressure indicated on the

sidewall of the tire to set the beads without additional precautions

listed below. If the beads do not seat at the maximum pressure

indicated, re-lubricate and try again.

When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi (1.38 bar)

greater than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall, the following

precautions must be taken to protect the person mounting the tire:

1. Make sure that you have the correct tire and wheel size.

2. Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area again.

3. Stand at a minimum of 12 ft (3.66 m) away from the tire wheel

assembly.

4. Use both eye and ear protection.

For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than the

maximum pressure, a Ford Dealer or other tire service professional

should do the mounting.

Always inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the person

inflating standing at a minimum of 12 ft (3.66 m) away from the tire

wheel assembly.

Important: Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road

tires are replaced on your vehicle.

It is recommended that the two front tires or two rear tires generally be

replaced as a pair.

The tire pressure sensors mounted in the wheels (originally installed on

your vehicle) are not designed to be used in aftermarket wheels.

The use of wheels or tires not recommended by Ford Motor Company

may affect the operation of your Tire Pressure Monitoring System.

If the TPMS indicator is flashing, your TPMS is malfunctioning. Your

replacement tire might be incompatible with your TPMS, or some

component of the TPMS may be damaged.

Safety practices

Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety.

• Observe posted speed limits

• Avoid fast starts, stops and turns

• Avoid potholes and objects on the road

167

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tires, Wheels and Loading

• Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking

WARNING: If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc., do

not rapidly spin the tires; spinning the tires can tear the tire and

cause an explosion. A tire can explode in as little as three to five

seconds.

WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h).

The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.

Highway hazards

No matter how carefully you drive there’s always the possibility that you

may eventually have a flat tire on the highway. Drive slowly to the

closest safe area out of traffic. This may further damage the flat tire, but

your safety is more important.

If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving, or you

suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your

speed. Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and

inspect the tires for damage. If a tire is under-inflated or damaged,

deflate it, remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel. If

you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair

facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.

Tire and wheel alignment

A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your

vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires. If your

vehicle seems to pull to one side when you’re driving, the wheels may be

out of alignment. Have an authorized dealer check the wheel alignment

periodically.

Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid

treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by an authorized dealer.

Front-wheel drive (FWD) vehicles and those with an independent rear

suspension (if equipped) may require alignment of all four wheels.

The tires should also be balanced periodically. An unbalanced tire and

wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear.

Tire rotation

Rotating your tires at the recommended interval (as indicated in the

scheduled maintenance information that comes with your vehicle) will

help your tires wear more evenly, providing better tire performance and

longer tire life.

168

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tires, Wheels and Loading

• Rear-wheel drive (RWD)

vehicles/Four-wheel drive

(4WD)/All-wheel drive (AWD)

vehicles (front tires at top of

diagram)

Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires.

Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask an authorized dealer to check

for and correct any wheel misalignment, tire imbalance or mechanical

problem involved before tire rotation.

Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire/wheel. A

dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that is

different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If

you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel it is intended for temporary use

only and should not be used in a tire rotation.

Note: After having your tires rotated, inflation pressure must be checked

and adjusted to the vehicle requirements.

INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL

Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to

place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This

information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of

the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for

safety standard certification and in case of a recall.

169

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tires, Wheels and Loading

Information on “P” type tires

P215/65R15 95H is an example of a

tire size, load index and speed

rating. The definitions of these

items are listed below. (Note that

the tire size, load index and speed

rating for your vehicle may be

different from this example.)

1. P: Indicates a tire, designated by

the Tire and Rim Association

(T&RA), that may be used for

service on cars, SUVs, minivans and

light trucks.

Note: If your tire size does not

begin with a letter this may mean it

is designated by either ETRTO

(European Tire and Rim Technical Organization) or JATMA (Japan Tire

Manufacturing Association).

2. 215: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from

sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the

wider the tire.

3. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to

width.

4. R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.

5. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your

wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel

diameter.

6. 95: Indicates the tire’s load index. It is an index that relates to how

much weight a tire can carry. You may find this information in your

Owner’s Guide. If not, contact a local tire dealer.

Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not

required by federal law.

7. H: Indicates the tire’s speed rating. The speed rating denotes the

speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of

time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure. The tires

on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation

pressure. These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference

in conditions. The ratings range from 81 mph (130 km/h) to 186 mph

(299 km/h). These ratings are listed in the following chart.

170

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tires, Wheels and Loading

Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not

required by federal law.

Letter rating

Speed rating - mph (km/h)

81 mph (130 km/h)

87 mph (140 km/h)

99 mph (159 km/h)

106 mph (171 km/h)

112 mph (180 km/h)

118 mph (190 km/h)

124 mph (200 km/h)

130 mph (210 km/h)

149 mph (240 km/h)

168 mph (270 km/h)

186 mph (299 km/h)

Note: For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph

(240 km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For

those with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire

manufacturers always use the letters ZR.

8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): This begins with the

letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The

next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was

manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last four

numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example,

the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers

go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The

numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability. This

information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall.

9. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or

AT: All Terrain, or

AS: All Season.

10. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: Indicates the number of

plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and

sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the

tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.

11. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and

pounds that can be carried by the tire. Refer to the Safety Compliance

Certification Label, which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the

driver’s door, for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle.

171

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tires, Wheels and Loading

12. Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades

• Treadwear: The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the

wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a

specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150

would wear one and one-half (1¹⁄2) times as well on the government

course as a tire graded 100.

• Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B,

and C. The grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement

as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test

surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor

traction performance.

• Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C,

representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its

ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a

specified indoor laboratory test wheel.

13. Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure: Indicates the tire

manufacturers’ maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at

which the maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is

normally higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation

pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification

Label or Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the

driver’s door. The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than

the recommended pressure on the vehicle label.

The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings such

as standard load, radial tubeless, etc.

172

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tires, Wheels and Loading

Additional information contained on the tire sidewall for “LT” type

tires

“LT” type tires have some additional

information beyond those of “P”

type tires; these differences are

described below.

Note: Tire Quality Grades do not

apply to this type of tire.

1. LT: Indicates a tire, designated by

the Tire and Rim Association

(T&RA), that is intended for service

on light trucks.

2. Load Range/Load Inflation

Limits: Indicates the tire’s

load-carrying capabilities and its

inflation limits.

3. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the

maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a dual; defined

as four tires on the rear axle (a total of six or more tires on the vehicle).

4. Maximum Load Single lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the

maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single;

defined as two tires (total) on the rear axle.

173

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tires, Wheels and Loading

Information on “T” type tires

“T” type tires have some additional

information beyond those of “P”

type tires; these differences are

described below:

T145/80D16 is an example of a tire

size.

Note: The temporary tire size for

your vehicle may be different from

this example. Tire Quality Grades do

not apply to this type of tire.

1. T: Indicates a type of tire,

designated by the Tire and Rim

Association (T&RA), that is

intended for temporary service on

cars, SUVs, minivans and light

trucks.

2. 145: Indicates the nominal width

of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general,

the larger the number, the wider the tire.

3. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to

width. Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall.

4. D: Indicates a “diagonal” type tire.

R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.

5. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your

wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel

diameter.

Location of the tire label

You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size

and other important information located on the B-Pillar or the edge of

the driver’s door. Refer to the payload description and graphic in the

Vehicle loading — with and without a trailer section.

174

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tires, Wheels and Loading

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)

Each tire, including the spare (if

provided), should be checked

monthly when cold and inflated to

the inflation pressure recommended

by the vehicle manufacturer on the

vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires

of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire

inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation

pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire

pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure

telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should

stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the

proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the

tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces

fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling

and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire

maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire

pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger

illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator

to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS

malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.

When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for

approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated.

This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as

the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be

able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions

may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of

replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the

TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction

telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to

ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the

TPMS to continue to function properly.

The Tire Pressure Monitoring System complies with part 15 of the FCC

rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the

175

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tires, Wheels and Loading

following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful

interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause undesired operation.

WARNING: The Tire Pressure Monitoring System is NOT a

substitute for manually checking tire pressure. The tire pressure

should be checked periodically (at least monthly) using a tire gauge,

see Inflating your tires in this chapter. Failure to properly maintain

your tire pressure could increase the risk of tire failure, loss of control,

vehicle rollover and personal injury.

Changing tires with TPMS

Each road tire is equipped with

a tire pressure sensor located

inside the tire/wheel cavity. The

pressure sensor is attached to

the valve stem. The pressure

sensor is covered by the tire and

is not visible unless the tire is

removed. Care must be taken

when changing the tire to avoid

damaging the sensor. It is

recommended that you always have your tires serviced by an authorized

dealer.

The tire pressure should be checked periodically (at least monthly) using

an accurate tire gauge, refer to Inflating your tires in this chapter.

Understanding your Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

The Tire Pressure Monitoring System measures pressure in your four

road tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle. The Low

Tire Pressure Warning Lamp will turn ON if the tire pressure is

significantly low. Once the light is illuminated, your tires are under

inflated and need to be inflated to the manufacturer’s recommended tire

pressure. Even if the light turns ON and a short time later turns OFF,

your tire pressure still needs to be checked. Visit www.checkmytires.org

for additional information.

When your temporary spare tire is installed

When one of your road tires needs to be replaced with the temporary

spare, the TPMS system will continue to identify an issue to remind you

that the damaged road wheel/tire needs to be repaired and put back on

your vehicle.

176

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tires, Wheels and Loading

To restore the full functionality of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System,

have the damaged road wheel/tire repaired and remounted on your

vehicle. For additional information, refer to Changing tires with TPMS

in this section.

When you believe your system is not operating properly

The main function of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System is to warn you

when your tires need air. It can also warn you in the event the system is

no longer capable of functioning as intended. Please refer to the

following chart for information concerning your Tire Pressure Monitoring

System:

Low Tire Pressure Possible

Warning Light cause

Customer Action Required

Solid Warning Light Tire(s)

1. Check your tire pressure to

under-inflated ensure tires are properly inflated;

refer to Inflating your tires in

this chapter.

2. After inflating your tires to the

manufacturer’s recommended

inflation pressure as shown on the

Tire Label (located on the edge of

driver’s door or the B-Pillar), the

vehicle must be driven for at least

two minutes over 20 mph

(32 km/h) before the light will

turn OFF.

Spare tire in Your temporary spare tire is in

use

use. Repair the damaged road

wheel/tire and reinstall it on the

vehicle to restore system

functionality. For a description on

how the system functions, refer to

When your temporary spare tire

is installed in this section.

TPMS

malfunction

If your tires are properly inflated

and your spare tire is not in use

and the light remains ON, contact

your authorized dealer as soon as

possible.

177

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tires, Wheels and Loading

Low Tire Pressure Possible

Customer Action Required

Warning Light

cause

Flashing Warning

Light

Spare tire in Your temporary spare tire is in

use

use. Repair the damaged road

wheel and re-mount it on the

vehicle to restore system

functionality. For a description of

how the system functions under

these conditions, refer to When

your temporary spare tire is

installed in this section.

TPMS

malfunction

If your tires are properly inflated

and your spare tire is not in use

and the TPMS warning light still

flashes, contact your authorized

dealer as soon as possible.

When inflating your tires

When putting air into your tires (such as at a gas station or in your

garage), the Tire Pressure Monitoring System may not respond

immediately to the air added to your tires.

It may take up to two minutes of driving over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the

light to turn OFF after you have filled your tires to the recommended

inflation pressure.

How temperature affects your tire pressure

The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) monitors tire pressure in

each pneumatic tire. While driving in a normal manner, a typical

passenger tire inflation pressure may increase approximately 2 to 4 psi

(14 to 28 kPa) from a cold start situation. If the vehicle is stationary

over night with the outside temperature significantly lower than the

daytime temperature, the tire pressure may decrease approximately 3 psi

(21 kPa) for a drop of 30°F (17°C) in ambient temperature. This lower

pressure value may be detected by the TPMS as being significantly lower

than the recommended inflation pressure and activate the TPMS warning

for low tire pressure. If the low tire pressure warning light is ON, visually

check each tire to verify that no tire is flat. (If one or more tires are flat,

repair as necessary.) Check air pressure in the road tires. If any tire is

under-inflated, carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest location where

air can be added to the tires. Inflate all the tires to the recommended

inflation pressure.

178

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tires, Wheels and Loading

SNOW TIRES AND CHAINS

WARNING: Driving too fast for conditions creates the possibility

of loss of vehicle control. Driving at very high speeds for

extended periods of time may result in damage to vehicle components.

WARNING: Snow tires must be the same size, load index, speed

rating as those originally provided by Ford. Use of any tire or

wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and

performance of your vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of

loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.

Additionally, the use of non-recommended tires and wheels could

cause steering, suspension, axle or transfer case/power transfer unit

failure.

The tires on your vehicle may have all weather treads to provide traction

in rain and snow. However, in some climates, you may need to use snow

tires and chains. Use chains on the tires only in an emergency or if the

law requires them.

Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains:

• Chains may damage aluminum wheels.

• Use only SAE Class S chains with P215/60R17 tires on the rear of the

vehicle only.

• Do not use tire chains with size P235/50R18 or 245/45R19 tires. Use of

SAE Class S chains or other chain types may damage your vehicle.

• Install chains securely, verifying that the chains do not touch any

wiring, brake lines or fuel lines.

• Drive cautiously. If you hear the chains rub or bang against your

vehicle, stop and re-tighten the chains. If this does not work, remove

the chains to prevent damage to your vehicle.

• If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle.

• Remove the tire chains when they are no longer needed. Do not use

tire chains on dry roads.

• The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle

damage. Do not remove these components from your vehicle when

using snow tires and chains.

179

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tires, Wheels and Loading

SUMMER TIRES

Your Ford vehicle may be equipped with summer tires to provide

superior performance on wet and dry roads. Summer tires do not have

the Mud and Snow (M+S or M/S) tire traction rating on the tire side

wall. Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance as

All-season or Snow tires, Ford does not recommend using summer tires

when temperatures are below 40°F (5°C) or in snow / ice conditions. If

you must drive in those conditions, Ford recommends using Mud & Snow

(M+S or M/S), All-season or Snow tires.

VEHICLE LOADING – WITH AND WITHOUT A TRAILER

This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and/or

trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating

capability, with or without a trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will

provide maximum return of vehicle design performance. Before loading

your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining

your vehicle’s weight ratings, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle’s

Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label:

Base Curb Weight – is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of

fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or

optional equipment.

Vehicle Curb Weight – is the weight of your new vehicle when you

picked it up from your authorized dealer plus any aftermarket

equipment.

180

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tires, Wheels and Loading

Payload – is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the

vehicle is carrying. The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found

on the Tire Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door

(vehicles exported outside the US and Canada may not have a Tire

Label). Look for “THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND

CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX lb.” for

maximum payload. The payload listed on the Tire Label is the maximum

payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If any aftermarket

or authorized-dealer installed equipment has been installed on the

vehicle, the weight of the equipment must be subtracted from the

payload listed on the Tire Label in order to determine the new payload.

WARNING: The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can

be limited either by volume capacity (how much space is

available) or by payload capacity (how much weight the vehicle should

carry). Once you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle,

do not add more cargo, even if there is space available. Overloading or

improperly loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle

control and vehicle rollover.

181

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tires, Wheels and Loading

Example only:

Cargo Weight – includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight,

including cargo and optional equipment. When towing, trailer tongue load

weight is also part of cargo weight.

GAW (Gross Axle Weight) – is the total weight placed on each axle

(front and rear) – including vehicle curb weight and all payload.

182

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tires, Wheels and Loading

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable

weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These

numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label

located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The total

load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR.

Note: For trailer towing information refer to Trailer towing found in

this chapter or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your

authorized dealer.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) – is the Vehicle Curb Weight + cargo +

passengers.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable

weight of the fully loaded vehicle (including all options, equipment,

passengers and cargo). The GVWR is shown on the Safety

Compliance Certification Label located on the B-Pillar or the

edge of the driver’s door. The GVW must never exceed the GVWR.

183

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tires, Wheels and Loading

• Example only:

WARNING: Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label

vehicle weight rating limits could result in substandard vehicle

handling or performance, engine, transmission and/or structural

damage, serious damage to the vehicle, loss of control and personal

injury.

184

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tires, Wheels and Loading

GCW (Gross Combined Weight) – is the weight of the loaded vehicle

(GVW) plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer.

GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable

weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer – including all cargo and

passengers – that the vehicle can handle without risking damage.

(Important: The towing vehicles’ braking system is rated for operation at

GVWR, not at GCWR. Separate functional brakes should be used for safe

control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the towing

vehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle. The

GCW must never exceed the GCWR.

Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight – is the highest possible weight of a

fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow. It assumes a vehicle with only

mandatory options, no cargo (internal or external), a tongue load of

10–15% (conventional trailer), and driver only (150 lb. [68 kg]). Consult

your authorized dealer (or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide

provided by your authorized dealer) for more detailed

information.

WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on

the Safety Compliance Certification Label.

WARNING: Do not use replacement tires with lower load

carrying capacities than the original tires because they may

lower the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires

with a higher limit than the original tires do not increase the GVWR

and GAWR limitations.

WARNING: Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could

result in serious damage to the vehicle and/or personal injury.

185

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tires, Wheels and Loading

Steps for determining the correct load limit:

1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo

should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will

be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX

kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage

load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs. and

there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of

available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400–750 (5 x 150) =

650 lb.). In metric units (635–340 (5 x 68) = 295 kg.)

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on

the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and

luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be

transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this

reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available

amount of cargo and luggage load capacity:

• Another example for your vehicle with 1,400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and

luggage capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is there enough load

capacity to carry you, 4 of your friends and all the golf bags? You and

four friends average 220 lb. (99 kg) each and the golf bags weigh

approximately 30 lb. (13.5 kg) each. The calculation would be: 1,400 -

(5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1,400 - 1,100 - 150 = 150 lb. Yes, you have

enough load capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and

your golf bags. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (5 x

99 kg) - (5 x 13.5 kg) = 635 - 495 - 67.5 = 72.5 kg.

• A final example for your vehicle with 1,400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and

luggage capacity. You and one of your friends decide to pick up

cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio

you have been planning for the past 2 years. Measuring the inside of

the vehicle with the rear seat folded down, you have room for

12-100 lb. (45 kg) bags of cement. Do you have enough load capacity

to transport the cement to your home? If you and your friend each

weigh 220 lb. (99 kg), the calculation would be: 1,400 - (2 x 220) -

(12 x 100) = 1,400 - 440 - 1,200 = - 240 lb. No, you do not have

enough cargo capacity to carry that much weight. In metric units, the

186

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tires, Wheels and Loading

calculation would be: 635 kg - (2 x 99 kg) - (12 x 45 kg) = 635 - 198 -

540 = -103 kg. You will need to reduce the load weight by at least

240 lb. (104 kg). If you remove 3-100 lb. (45 kg) cement bags, then

the load calculation would be:

1,400 - (2 x 220) - (9 x 100) = 1,400 - 440 - 900 = 60 lb. Now you

have the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home.

In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (2 x 99 kg) - (9 x

45 kg) = 635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kg.

The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your

vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross

Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance

Certification Label found on the edge of the driver’s door.

TRAILER TOWING

Your vehicle is capable of towing a trailer up to 1,000 lb (454 kg) gross

trailer weight with a maximum tongue load of 100 lb (45 kg). Do not tow

a trailer until your vehicle has been driven at least 500 miles (800 km).

Do not tow with the Shelby GT500; it is not rated to tow a trailer.

Towing a trailer places an additional load on your vehicle’s engine,

transmission, brakes, tires and suspension. Inspect these components

carefully after towing.

WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on

the certification label.

WARNING: Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended

gross trailer weight exceeds the limit of the vehicle and could

result in engine damage, transmission damage, structural damage, loss

of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and personal injury.

Preparing to tow

Use the proper equipment for towing a trailer and make sure it is

properly attached to your vehicle. Contact your authorized dealer or a

reliable trailer dealer as soon as possible if you require assistance.

Hitches

Do not use hitches that clamp onto the vehicle bumper; use a load

carrying hitch. You must distribute the load in your trailer so that

10–15% of the total weight of the trailer is on the tongue.

187

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tires, Wheels and Loading

Safety chains

Always connect the trailer’s safety chains to the frame or hook retainers

of the vehicle hitch. To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross the

chains under the trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners.

If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions that the rental agency

gives to you.

Do not attach safety chains to the bumper.

Trailer brakes

Electric brakes and manual, automatic or surge-type trailer brakes are

safe if installed properly and adjusted to the manufacturer’s

specifications. The trailer brakes must meet local and Federal

regulations.

WARNING: Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake system

directly to your vehicle’s brake system. Your vehicle may not

have enough braking power and your chances of having a collision

greatly increase.

The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the

GVWR not GCWR.

Trailer lamps

Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles. Make sure all running

lights, brake lights, turn signals and hazard lights are working.

Do not splice into the vehicle lamp wiring for trailer lamps. Your

vehicle uses an advanced electronic module to control and

monitor your vehicle lamps. Splicing into the wiring or attaching

wiring to the vehicle bulb. may DISABLE the rear vehicle lamps

or cause them not to function properly.

Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible for proper

instructions and equipment for hooking-up trailer lamps.

Driving while you tow

When towing a trailer:

• Consult your local motor vehicle speed regulations for towing a trailer.

• Turn off the speed control. The speed control may shut off

automatically when you are towing on long, steep grades.

• Shift out of D (Overdrive) into D (Overdrive cancelled) or a lower

gear (3, 2, or 1) when towing up or down steep hills. This will

188

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tires, Wheels and Loading

eliminate excessive downshifting and upshifting for optimum fuel

economy and transmission cooling.

• Anticipate stops and brake gradually.

Servicing after towing

If you tow a trailer for long distances, your vehicle will require more

frequent service intervals. Refer to your scheduled maintenance

information for more information.

Trailer towing tips

• The trailer tongue weight should be 10–15% of the loaded trailer

weight.

• Practice turning, stopping and backing-up before starting on a trip to

get the feel of the vehicle-trailer combination. When turning, make

wider turns so the trailer wheels will clear curbs and other obstacles.

• Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached.

• To aid in engine/transmission cooling and A/C efficiency during hot

weather while stopped in traffic, place the gearshift lever in P (Park)

(automatic transmission) or neutral (manual transmissions).

• After you have traveled 50 miles (80 km), thoroughly check your

hitch, electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts.

• If you are driving down a long or steep hill, shift to a lower gear. Do

not apply the brakes continuously, as they may overheat and become

less effective.

• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. If you must

park on a grade, place wheel chocks under the trailer’s wheels.

RECREATIONAL TOWING

Follow these guidelines if you have a need for recreational (RV) towing.

An example of recreational towing would be towing your vehicle behind

a motorhome. These guidelines are designed to ensure that your

transmission is not damaged.

Do not tow your vehicle with any wheels on the ground, as vehicle or

transmission damage may occur. It is recommended to tow your vehicle

with all four (4) wheels off the ground such as when using a car-hauling

trailer. Otherwise, no recreational towing is permitted.

In case of a roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle, see Wrecker

towing in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.

189

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Driving

STARTING

Positions of the ignition

1. Off — locks the automatic

transmission gearshift lever and

allows key removal.

Note: The ignition key cannot be

removed from the ignition unless

the gearshift lever is securely

latched in P (Park).

2. Accessory — allows the electrical

accessories such as the radio to

operate while the engine is not

running.

3. On — all electrical circuits operational. Warning lights illuminated. Key

position when driving.

4. Start — cranks the engine. Release the key as soon as the engine

starts.

Preparing to start your vehicle

Engine starting is controlled by the powertrain control system.

This system meets all Canadian interference-causing equipment standard

requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of radio

noise.

When starting a fuel-injected engine, don’t press the accelerator before

or during starting. Only use the accelerator when you have difficulty

starting the engine. For more information on starting the vehicle, refer to

Starting the engine in this chapter.

WARNING: Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce

very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system,

creating the risk of fire or other damage.

WARNING: Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass

or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the

engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.

190

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Driving

WARNING: Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in

other enclosed areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open

the garage door before you start the engine. See Guarding against

exhaust fumes in this chapter for more instructions.

WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have

your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you

smell exhaust fumes.

Important safety precautions

A computer system controls the engine’s idle revolutions per minute

(RPM). When the engine starts, the idle RPM runs higher than normal in

order to warm the engine. If the engine idle speed does not slow down

automatically, have the vehicle checked. Do not allow the vehicle to idle

for more than 10 minutes at the higher engine RPM.

Before starting the vehicle:

1. Make sure all vehicle occupants have buckled their safety belts. For

more information on safety belts and their proper usage, refer to the

Seating and Safety Restraints chapter.

2. Make sure the headlamps and vehicle accessories are off.

If starting a vehicle with an automatic transmission:

• Make sure the gearshift is in P

(Park).

191

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Driving

• Make sure the parking brake is

set.

If starting a vehicle with a manual transmission:

• Make sure the parking brake is

set.

• Push the clutch pedal to the floor

3. Turn the key to 3 (on) without

turning the key to 4 (start).

Some warning lights will briefly illuminate. See Warning lights and

chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter for more information

regarding the warning lights.

192

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Driving

Starting the engine

1. Turn the key to 3 (on) without

turning the key to 4 (start). If there

is difficulty in turning the key,

rotate the steering wheel until the

key turns freely.

2. Turn the key to 4 (start), then

release the key as soon as the

engine starts.

Note: If the engine does not start within five seconds on the first try,

turn the key to off, wait 10 seconds and try again. If the engine still fails

to start, press and hold the accelerator to the floor and try again; this

will allow the engine to crank with the fuel shut off in case the engine is

flooded with fuel.

Guarding against exhaust fumes

Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoid

its dangerous effects.

WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have

your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you

smell exhaust fumes.

Important ventilating information

If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped for a long period of

time, open the windows at least 1 inch (2.5 cm) or adjust the heating or

air conditioning to bring in fresh air.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF EQUIPPED)

An engine block heater warms the engine coolant which aids in starting

and allows the heater/defroster system to respond quickly. If your vehicle

is equipped with this system, your equipment includes a heater element

which is installed in your engine block and a wire harness which allows

the user to connect the system to a grounded 120 volt A/C electrical

source. The block heater system is most effective when outdoor

temperatures reach below 0°F (-18°C).

193

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Driving

WARNING: Failure to follow engine block heater instructions

could result in property damage or physical injury.

WARNING: To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use

your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged

(cheater) adapters.

Prior to using the engine block heater, follow these recommendations for

proper and safe operation:

• For your safety, use an outdoor extension cord that is product

certified by Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) or Canadian Standards

Association (CSA). Use only an extension cord that can be used

outdoors, in cold temperatures, and is clearly marked “Suitable for Use

with Outdoor Appliances.” Never use an indoor extension cord

outdoors; it could result in an electric shock or fire hazard.

• Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord, minimum.

• Use as short an extension cord as possible.

• Do not use multiple extension cords. Instead, use one extension cord

which is long enough to reach from the engine block heater cord to

the outlet without stretching.

• Make certain that the extension cord is in excellent condition (not

patched or spliced). Store your extension cord indoors at

temperatures above 32°F (0°C). Outdoor conditions can deteriorate

extension cords over a period of time.

• To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use your heater with

ungrounded electrical systems or two pronged (cheater) adapters.

Also ensure that the block heater, especially the cord, is in good

condition before use.

• Make sure that when in operation, the extension cord plug/engine

block heater cord plug connection is free and clear of water in order

to prevent possible shock or fire.

• Be sure that areas where the vehicle is parked are clean and clear of

all combustibles such as petroleum products, dust, rags, paper and

similar items.

• Be sure that the engine block heater, heater cord and extension cord

are solidly connected. A poor connection can cause the cord to

become very hot and may result in an electrical shock or fire. Be sure

to check for heat anywhere in the electrical hookup once the system

has been operating for approximately a half hour.

194

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Driving

• Finally, have the engine block heater system checked during your fall

tune-up to be sure it’s in good working order.

How to use the engine block heater

Ensure the receptacle terminals are clean and dry prior to use. To clean

them, use a dry cloth.

Depending on the type of factory installed equipment, your engine block

heater will use .4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours of energy per hour of use. Your

factory installed block heater system does not have a thermostat;

however, maximum temperature is attained after approximately three

hours of operation. Block heater operation longer than three hours will

not improve system performance and will unnecessarily use additional

electricity.

Make sure system is unplugged and properly stowed before driving the

vehicle. While not in use, make sure the protective cover seals the

prongs of the engine block heater cord plug.

BRAKES

Occasional brake noise is normal. If a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding

or continuous squeal sound is present, the brake linings may be worn-out

and should be inspected by an authorized dealer. If the vehicle has

continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking, the

vehicle should be inspected by an authorized dealer.

Refer to Warning lights and

chimes in the Instrument Cluster

chapter for information on the brake

system warning light.

BRAKE

Four-wheel anti-lock brake system (ABS)

Your vehicle is equipped with an anti-lock braking system (ABS). This

system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops by

keeping the brakes from locking. Noise from the ABS pump motor and

brake pedal pulsation may be observed during ABS braking; any

pulsation or mechanical noise you may feel or hear is normal.

195

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Driving

ABS warning lamp

The ABS lamp in the instrument

cluster momentarily illuminates

ABS

when the ignition is turned on. If

the light does not illuminate during

start up, remains on or flashes, the

ABS may be disabled and may need to be serviced.

Even when the ABS is disabled,

normal braking is still effective. If

your BRAKE warning lamp

illuminates with the parking brake

released, have your brake system

serviced immediately.

BRAKE

Using ABS

When hard braking is required, apply continuous force on the brake

pedal; do not pump the brake pedal since this will reduce the

effectiveness of the ABS and will increase your vehicle’s stopping

distance. The ABS will be activated immediately, allowing you to retain

steering control during hard braking and on slippery surfaces. However,

the ABS does not decrease stopping distance.

Parking brake

To set the parking brake (1), pull

the parking brake handle up as far

as possible.

The BRAKE warning lamp will

illuminate and will remain

illuminated until the parking brake

is released.

BRAKE

To release, press and hold the button (2), pull the handle up slightly,

then push the handle down.

196

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Driving

WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure

that the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park) (automatic

transmission) or in 1 (First) (manual transmission).

WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake

warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be

working properly. See your authorized dealer as soon as possible.

ADVANCETRACா STABILITY ENHANCEMENT SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with the AdvanceTrac௡ system. The

AdvanceTrac௡ system provides the following stability enhancement

features for certain driving situations:

• Traction control system (TCS), which functions to help avoid

drive-wheel spin and loss of traction.

• Electronic stability control (ESC), which functions to help avoid skids

or lateral slides

WARNING: Vehicle modifications involving braking system,

aftermarket roof racks, suspension, steering system, tire

construction and/or wheel/tire size may change the handling

characteristics of the vehicle and may adversely affect the performance

of the AdvanceTrac௡ system. In addition, installing any stereo

loudspeakers may interfere with and adversely affect the AdvanceTrac௡

system. Install any aftermarket stereo loudspeaker as far as possible

from the front center console, the tunnel, and the front seats in order

to minimize the risk of interfering with the AdvanceTrac௡ sensors.

Reducing the effectiveness of the AdvanceTrac௡ system could lead to

an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal

injury and death.

WARNING: Remember that even advanced technology cannot

defy the laws of physics. It’s always possible to lose control of a

vehicle due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Aggressive

driving on any road condition can cause you to lose control of your

vehicle increasing the risk of personal injury or property damage.

Activation of the AdvanceTrac௡ system is an indication that at least

some of the tires have exceeded their ability to grip the road; this

could reduce the operator’s ability to control the vehicle potentially

resulting in a loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury

and death. If your AdvanceTrac௡ system activates, SLOW DOWN.

197

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Driving

WARNING: If a failure has been detected within the

AdvanceTrac௡ system, the stability control light and the stability

control off light will illuminate steadily. If the stability control light and

the stability control off light illuminate steadily, contact your

authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the system serviced

immediately. Operating your vehicle with AdvanceTrac௡ disabled could

lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,

personal injury and death.

The AdvanceTrac௡ system automatically enables each time the engine is

started. All features of the AdvanceTrac௡ system (TCS and ESC) are

active and monitor the vehicle from start-up. However, the system will

only intervene if the driving situation requires it.

The AdvanceTrac௡ system includes

a stability control button on the

center console, a stability control

light and a stability control off light

in the instrument cluster. Both the

stability control light and the

stability control off light in the

instrument cluster will illuminate

temporarily during start-up as part of a normal system self-check. The

stability control light may illuminate (flash) during certain driving

situations which cause the AdvanceTrac௡ system to operate. If the

stability control light and the stability control off light illuminate steadily,

contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the system

serviced immediately. If equipped with a message center, the vehicle will

also indicate a failure with the AdvanceTrac௡ system.

When AdvanceTrac௡ performs a normal system self-check, some drivers

may notice a slight movement of the brake, and/or a rumble, grunting, or

grinding noise after startup and when driving off.

When an event occurs that activates AdvanceTrac௡ you may experience

the following:

• A slight deceleration of the vehicle

• The stability control light will flash.

• A vibration in the pedal when your foot is on the brake pedal

• If the driving condition is severe and your foot is not on the brake, the

brake pedal may move as the systems applies higher brake forces. You

may also hear a whoosh of air from under the instrument panel during

this severe condition.

198

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Driving

• The brake pedal may feel stiffer than usual.

Traction control system (TCS)

Traction control is a driver aid feature that helps your vehicle maintain

traction of the wheels, typically when driving on slippery and/or hilly

road surfaces, by detecting and controlling wheel spin.

Excessive wheel spin is controlled in two ways, which may work

separately or in tandem, engine traction control and brake traction

control. Engine traction control works to limit drive-wheel spin by

momentarily reducing engine power. Brake traction control works to limit

wheel spin by momentarily applying the brakes to the wheel that is

slipping. Traction control is most active at low speeds.

During TCS events, the stability control light in the instrument cluster

will flash.

If the TCS is activated excessively in a short period of time, the braking

portion of the system may become temporarily disabled to allow the

brakes to cool down. In this situation, the TCS will use only engine

power reduction or transfer to help control the wheels from

over-spinning. When the brakes have cooled down, the system will regain

all features. Anti-lock braking, and ESC are not affected by this condition

and will continue to function during the cool-down period.

The engine traction control and brake traction control system may be

deactivated in certain situations. See the Switching off AdvanceTrac௡

section below.

If you should become stuck in snow or ice or on a very slippery road

surface, try switching the TCS off. This may allow excess wheel spin to

“dig” the vehicle out and enable a successful “rocking” maneuver.

Electronic stability control (ESC)

Electronic stability control (ESC) may enhance your vehicle’s directional

stability during adverse maneuvers, for example when cornering severely

or avoiding objects in the roadway. ESC operates by applying brakes to

one or more of the wheels individually and, if necessary, reducing engine

power if the system detects that the vehicle is about to skid or slide

laterally.

During ESC events, the stability control light in the instrument cluster

will flash.

Certain adverse driving maneuvers may activate the ESC system, which

include but are not limited to:

• Taking a turn too fast

199

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Driving

• Maneuvering quickly to avoid an accident, pedestrian or obstacle

• Driving over a patch of ice or other slippery surfaces

• Changing lanes on a snow-rutted road

• Entering a snow-free road from a snow-covered side street, or vice

versa

• Entering a paved road from a gravel road, or vice versa

• Cornering while towing a heavily loaded trailer (refer to Trailer

towing in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter).

Switching off AdvanceTrac௡

If the vehicle is stuck in snow, mud or sand, and seems to lose engine

power, switching off certain features of the AdvanceTrac௡ system may be

beneficial because the wheels are allowed to spin. This will restore full

engine power and will enhance momentum through the obstacle.

The AdvanceTrac௡ button can be

used to enable unique

AdvanceTrac௡ modes.

Full features of the AdvanceTrac௡

system can be restored by pressing

the stability control button again or

by turning off and restarting the

engine.

When features of the AdvanceTrac௡

system are off, the stability control

off light will illuminate steadily.

Pressing the stability control button

again will turn off the stability

control off light.

In R (Reverse), ABS and the engine traction control and brake traction

control features will continue to function; however, ESC is disabled.

200

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Driving

AdvanceTrac௡ Features

Message

“Sliding

car off”

icon

Control

switch func-

tions

Center

Mode

ESC

TCS

Display (if

equipped)

Turns on

during

bulb

Default at

start-up

En-

abled abled

check

Control

TRACTION

CONTROL

OFF

switch

Traction con-

trol OFF

En-

Dis-

pressed once

momentarily

abled abled

Control

switch

ADVANCE

TRAC

SPORT

MODE

pressed twice

rapidly,

Sport Mode

(if equipped)

En-

abled abled

brakes ap-

plied and no

throttle apply

Control

switch

pressed and

held for more

than five sec-

onds, vehicle

speed =

Advance-

Trac௡ Dis-

abled

ADVANCE

Dis-

Off

TRAC OFF abled abled

0 mph

(0 km/h),

brakes ap-

plied

Control

switch

pressed again Trac௡ fully

after deacti-

vation

Advance-

ADVANCE

TRAC ON

En-

abled abled

En-

enabled

AdvanceTrac௡ Sport Mode (if equipped)

The AdvanceTrac௡ system provides an available sport mode on some

models. This can be selected utilizing the stability off button as shown in

the table above.

201

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Driving

Sport mode is not intended for use on public roadways as this mode

provides less AdvanceTrac௡ system intervention than when the default

ESC and traction control systems are on. Sport mode will allow more

spirited driving while the AdvanceTrac௡ system is still enabled.

STEERING

To help prevent damage to the power steering system:

• Never hold the steering wheel at its furthest turning points (until it

stops) for more than a few seconds when the engine is running.

• Do not operate the vehicle with a low power steering fluid level

(below the MIN mark on the reservoir).

• Some noise is normal during operation. If the noise is excessive, check

for a low power steering fluid level before seeking service by your

authorized dealer.

• Heavy or uneven steering efforts may be caused by a low power

steering fluid level. Check for a low power steering fluid level before

seeking service by your authorized dealer.

• Do not fill the power steering fluid reservoir above the MAX mark on

the reservoir.

If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is turned

off), you can steer the vehicle manually, but it takes more effort.

If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:

• An improperly inflated tire

• Uneven tire wear

• Loose or worn suspension components

• Loose or worn steering components

• Improper steering alignment

A high crown in the road or high crosswinds may also make the steering

seem to wander/pull.

TRACTION-LOK™ AXLE (IF EQUIPPED)

This axle provides added traction on slippery surfaces, particularly when

one wheel is on a poor traction surface. Under normal conditions, the

Traction-Lok™ axle functions like a standard rear axle.

Extended use of other than the manufacturer’s specified size tires on a

Traction-Lok™ rear axle could result in a permanent reduction in

effectiveness. This loss of effectiveness does not affect normal driving

and should not be noticeable to the driver.

202

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Driving

BRAKE-SHIFT INTERLOCK

This vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents

the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the ignition is

in the on position unless the brake pedal is pressed.

If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with ignition in

the on position and the brake pedal pressed:

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Using a flat head screwdriver or

similar tool, remove the cap.

3. Locate the access hole at the

front of the area under the cover.

4. Insert the screwdriver or similar

tool into the hole and press and

hold the lever forward while pulling

the gearshift lever out of the P

(Park) position and into the N

(Neutral) position.

5. Reinstall the cap.

6. Start the vehicle.

If it is necessary to use the above procedure to move the gearshift lever,

it is possible that a fuse has blown or the vehicle’s brake lamps are not

operating properly. Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside

Emergencies chapter.

WARNING: Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the

brakelamps are working.

WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure

the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the off

position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.

203

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Driving

WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake

warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be

working properly. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible to

have the system serviced immediately.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)

Understanding the gearshift positions of the 5–speed automatic

transmission

This vehicle is equipped with an Adaptive Transmission Control Strategy.

This Adaptive Transmission Control Strategy offers the optimal

transmission operation and shift quality. When the vehicle’s battery has

been disconnected for any type of service or repair, the transmission will

need to relearn the normal shift strategy parameters, much like having to

reset your radio stations when your vehicle battery has been

disconnected. The Adaptive Transmission Control Strategy allows the

transmission to relearn these operating parameters. This learning process

could take several transmission upshifts and downshifts; during this

learning process, slightly firmer shifts may occur. After this learning

process, normal shift feel and shift scheduling will resume.

P (Park)

This position locks the transmission

and prevents the rear wheels from

turning.

To put your vehicle in gear:

• Start the engine

• Press the brake pedal

• Move the gearshift lever into the

desired gear

To put your vehicle in P (Park):

• Come to a complete stop

• Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park)

WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure

the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the off

position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.

204

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Driving

R (Reverse)

With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward.

Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R

(Reverse).

N (Neutral)

With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is

free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.

D (Drive) with Overdrive

The normal driving position for the best fuel economy. Transmission

operates in gears one through five.

D (Drive) without Overdrive

D (Drive) with Overdrive can be

deactivated by pressing the

transmission control switch on the

right side of the shift handle.

• This position allows for all

forward gears except Overdrive.

• O/D OFF lamp is illuminated.

O/D

OFF

• Provides engine braking.

• Use when driving conditions

cause excessive shifting from O/D to other gears. Examples: heavy city

traffic where continuous shifting in and out of overdrive occurs, hilly

terrain, heavy loads, trailer towing and when engine braking is

required.

• To return to Overdrive mode, press the transmission control switch.

The O/D OFF lamp will not be illuminated.

• Overdrive mode is automatically returned each time the key is turned

off.

205

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Driving

3 (Third)

This position allows for third gear only.

• Provides engine braking.

• To return to D (Drive) without Overdrive, move the transmission shift

lever into the D (Drive) position.

• Selecting 3 (Third) at higher speeds will cause the transmission to

downshift to third gear at the appropriate vehicle speed.

2 (Second)

This position allows for second gear only.

• Provides engine braking.

• Use to start-up on slippery roads.

• To return to D (Drive) without Overdrive or 3 (Third), move the

transmission shift lever into the D (Drive) or 3 (Third) position.

• Selecting 2 (Second) at higher speeds will cause the transmission to

downshift to second gear at the appropriate vehicle speed.

1 (First)

This position allows for first gear only.

• Provides maximum engine braking.

• Will not downshift into first gear at high speeds; will cause the

transmission to downshift to a lower gear, then allows for first gear

when the vehicle reaches slower speeds.

Forced downshifts

• Allowed in Overdrive or Drive.

• Press the accelerator to the floor.

• Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear.

If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow

If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, it may be rocked out by

shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts in a

steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.

Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating

temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.

Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the

transmission and tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.

206

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Driving

MANUAL TRANSMISSION OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)

Using the clutch

Manual transmission vehicles have a starter interlock that prevents

cranking the engine unless the clutch pedal is fully pressed.

To start the vehicle:

1. Make sure the parking brake is

fully set.

2. Press and hold the clutch pedal

to the floor, then put the gearshift

lever in the neutral position.

3. Start the engine.

4. Press the brake pedal and move

the gearshift lever to the desired

gear; 1 (First) or R (Reverse).

5. Release the parking brake, then

slowly release the clutch pedal while

slowly pressing on the accelerator.

During each shift, the clutch pedal

must be fully pressed to the floor.

Make sure the floor mat is properly

positioned so it doesn’t interfere

with the full extension of the clutch

pedal.

Failure to fully press the clutch pedal to the floor may cause

increased shift efforts, prematurely wear transmission

components or damage the transmission.

Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal or use the

clutch pedal to hold your vehicle at a standstill while waiting on a

hill. These actions will severely reduce the life of the clutch and

could nullify a clutch warranty claim.

207

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Driving

Recommended shift speeds

Do not downshift into 1 (First) when your vehicle is moving

faster than 15 mph (24 km/h). This will damage the clutch.

Upshift according to the following chart:

Upshifts when accelerating

(recommended for best fuel economy)

Shift from:

1 - 2

2 - 3

3 - 4

4 - 5

11 mph (18 km/h)

19 mph (31 km/h)

30 mph (48 km/h)

40 mph (64 km/h)

Reverse

1. Make sure that your vehicle is at

a complete stop before you shift

into R (Reverse). Failure to do so

may damage the transmission.

2. Move the gearshift lever into the

neutral position and wait at least

three seconds before shifting into R

(Reverse).

Note: The gearshift lever can only be moved into R (Reverse) by moving

it from left of 3 (Third) and 4 (Fourth) before shifting into R (Reverse).

This is a lockout feature that protects the transmission from accidentally

being shifted into R (Reverse) from 5 (Overdrive).

Parking your vehicle

1. Apply the brake and shift into the neutral position.

2. Fully apply the parking brake, then shift into 1 (First).

3. Turn the ignition off.

WARNING: Do not park your vehicle in Neutral, it may move

unexpectedly and injure someone. Use 1 (First) gear and set the

parking brake fully.

208

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Driving

REARVIEW CAMERA SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

The rearview camera system,

located on the trunk, provides a

video image which appears in the

rearview mirror or on the navigation

screen (if equipped), of the area

behind the vehicle. It adds

assistance to the driver while

reversing or reverse parking the

vehicle.

To use the camera system, place the transmission in R (Reverse); an

image will display in the rearview mirror or on the navigation screen (if

equipped). The area displayed on the screen may vary according to the

vehicle orientation and/or road condition.

• (1) Rear bumper

• (2) Red zone

• (3) Yellow zone

• (4) Green zone

Always use caution while backing.

Objects in the red zone are closest

to your vehicle and objects in the

green zone are further away. Objects

are getting closer to your vehicle as

they move from the green zone to the yellow or red zones.

Use the side mirrors and rearview mirror to get better coverage on both

sides and rear of the vehicle.

Image delay if displayed through the rearview mirror:

When shifting out of R (Reverse) and into any other gear, the image in

the rearview mirror will remain on for a few seconds before it shuts off

to assist in parking or trailer hookup.

Image delay if displayed through the navigation screen:

After shifting out of R (Reverse) and into any gear other than P (Park),

the image in the navigation screen will remain until the vehicle speed

reaches 5 mph (8 km/h), only if the rear camera delay feature is on, or

until any navigation radio button is pressed.

Note: The default setting for the rear camera delay is off. Press the

“Settings” button found on the navigation screen to set the rear camera

delay feature to on or off. Refer to the Navigation System supplement

for more information.

209

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Driving

The camera lens for the camera is located on the trunk. Keep the lens

clean so that the video image remains clear and undistorted. Clean the

lens with a soft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasive cleaner.

Note: If the camera system image is not clear or seems distorted, it may

be covered with water droplets, snow, mud or any other substance. If

this occurs, clean the camera lens before using the camera system.

WARNING: The camera system is a reverse aid supplement

device that still requires the driver to use it in conjunction with

the rearview mirror and the side mirrors for maximum coverage.

WARNING: Objects that are close to either corner of the

bumper or under the bumper, might not be seen on the screen

due to the limited coverage of the camera system.

WARNING: Backup as slow as possible since higher speeds

might limit your reaction time to stop the vehicle.

WARNING: Do not use the camera system with the trunk open.

If the back end of the vehicle is hit or damaged, then check with your

authorized dealer to have your rear video system checked for proper

coverage and operation.

Night time and dark area use

At night time or in dark areas, the camera system relies on the reverse

lamp lighting to produce an image. Therefore it is necessary that both

reverse lamps are operating in order to get a clear image in the dark. If

either of the lamps are not operating, stop using the camera system, at

least in the dark, until the lamp(s) are replaced and functioning.

Servicing

• If the image comes on while the vehicle is not in R (Reverse), have

the system inspected by your authorized dealer.

• If the image is not clear, then check if there is anything covering the

lens such as dirt, mud, ice, snow, etc. If the image is still not clear

after cleaning, have your system inspected by your authorized dealer.

210

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Driving

DRIVING THROUGH WATER

If driving through deep or standing

water is unavoidable, proceed very

slowly especially when the depth is

not known. Never drive through

water that is higher than the bottom

of the wheel rims (for cars) or the

bottom of the hubs (for trucks).

When driving through water, traction or brake capability may be limited.

Also, water may enter your engine’s air intake and severely damage your

engine or your vehicle may stall. Driving through deep water where

the transmission vent tube is submerged may allow water into the

transmission and cause internal transmission damage.

Once through the water, always dry the brakes by moving your

vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.

Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as quickly as dry brakes.

211

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Roadside Emergencies

ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE

Getting roadside assistance

To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor

Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This

program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The service

is available:

• 24-hours, seven days a week

• for the coverage period listed on the Roadside Assistance Card

included in your Owner Guide portfolio.

Roadside assistance will cover:

• a flat tire change with a good spare (except vehicles that have been

supplied with a tire inflation kit)

• battery jump start

• lock-out assistance (key replacement cost is the customer’s

responsibility)

• fuel delivery – Independent Service Contractors, if not prohibited by

state, local or municipal law shall deliver up to 2.0 gallons (7.5L) of

gasoline or 5.0 gallons (18.9L) of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle. Fuel

delivery service is limited to two no-charge occurrences within a

12-month period.

• winch out – available within 100 feet (30.5 meters) of a paved or

county maintained road, no recoveries.

• towing – Ford/Mercury/Lincoln eligible vehicle towed to an authorized

dealer within 35 miles (56 km) of the disablement location or to the

nearest authorized dealer. If a member requests to be towed to an

authorized dealer more than 35 miles (56 km) from the disablement

location, the member shall be responsible for any mileage costs in

excess of 35 miles (56 km).

Trailers shall be covered up to $200 if the disabled eligible vehicle

requires service at the nearest authorized dealer. If the trailer is disabled,

but the towing vehicle is operational, the trailer does not qualify for any

roadside services.

Canadian customers refer to your Customer Information Guide

for information on:

• coverage period

• exact fuel amounts

212

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Roadside Emergencies

• towing of your disabled vehicle

• emergency travel expense reimbursement

• travel planning benefits

In Canada, for uninterrupted Roadside Assistance coverage, you may

purchase extended coverage prior to your Basic Warranty’s Roadside

Assistance expiring. For more information and enrollment, contact

1-877-294-2582 or visit our website at www.ford.ca.

Using roadside assistance

Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your

wallet for quick reference. In the United States, this card is found in the

Owner Guide portfolio in the glove compartment. In Canada, the card is

found in the Customer Information Guide in the glove compartment.

U.S. Ford, Mercury and Lincoln vehicle customers who require Roadside

Assistance, call 1-800-241-3673.

Canadian customers who require roadside assistance, call

1-800-665-2006.

If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford Motor

Company will reimburse a reasonable amount for towing to the nearest

dealership within 35 miles (56 km). To obtain reimbursement

information, U.S. Ford, Mercury and Lincoln vehicle customers call

1-800-241-3673. Customers will be asked to submit their original

receipts.

Canadian customers who need to obtain reimbursement information, call

1-800-665-2006.

HAZARD FLASHER CONTROL

The hazard flasher control is located

on the center console next to the

gearshift lever. The hazard flashers

will operate when the ignition is in

any position or if the key is not in

the ignition.

Press in the flasher control and all front and rear direction signals will

flash. Press the flasher control again to turn them off. Use it when your

vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.

Note: With extended use, the flasher may run down your battery.

213

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Roadside Emergencies

FUEL

RESET

FUEL PUMP SHUT-OFF SWITCH

This device stops the electric fuel pump from sending fuel to the engine

when your vehicle has had a substantial jolt.

After an accident, if the engine cranks but does not start, this switch

may have been activated.

The fuel pump shut-off switch is

located in the driver’s footwell, by

the hood release.

To reset the switch:

1. Turn the ignition off.

2. Check the fuel system for leaks.

3. If no leaks are apparent, reset the

switch by pressing in on the reset

button.

4. Turn the ignition on.

5. Wait a few seconds and return the key to off.

6. Make another check for leaks.

FUSES AND RELAYS

Fuses

If electrical components in the

vehicle are not working, a fuse may

have blown. Blown fuses are

identified by a broken wire within

the fuse. Check the appropriate

fuses before replacing any electrical

components.

Note: Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage

rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire

damage and could start a fire.

214

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Roadside Emergencies

Standard fuse amperage rating and color

COLOR

Cartridge

maxi

fuses

—

Fuse

rating

Mini

fuses

Standard

fuses

Maxi

fuses

Fuse link

cartridge

Grey

Violet

Pink

Tan

Grey

Violet

Pink

Tan

—

7.5A

10A

15A

20A

25A

30A

40A

50A

60A

70A

80A

Brown

Red

Brown

Red

—

Yellow

—

Green

Orange

Red

Blue

Tan

Natural

—

Blue

—

Pink

Green

Red

Yellow

—

Blue

—

Pink

Green

Red

Yellow

Brown

Black

Blue

Yellow

Natural

Green

—

Blue

Yellow

Natural

Green

—

Black

Passenger compartment fuse panel

The fuse panel is located in the lower passenger side area behind the

kick panel. Open the trim panel door and remove the fuse cover to

access the fuses.

To remove a fuse, use the fuse puller tool provided to the left of the

fuses and relays.

215

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Roadside Emergencies

The fuses are coded as follows:

Fuse/Relay

Location

Fuse Amp

Rating

30A

Protected Circuits

Driver rear window (convertible only)

Brake On/Off (BOO) power

SYNC௡

Passenger rear window

(convertible only)

15A

30A

10A

Brake transmission shift interlock

(BTSI)

20A

10A

15A

Turn signals, Hazard flashers

Left low beam headlamp

Right low beam headlamp

Courtesy lamps

Switch illumination

216

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Roadside Emergencies

Fuse/Relay

Location

Fuse Amp

Rating

10A

Protected Circuits

Security module

Power mirrors

Not used (Spare)

Center information display, Electronic

finish panel, GPS

7.5A

10A

15A

20A

25A

15A

20A

10A

20A

10A

Climate control

Not used (Spare)

Power door locks

Not used (Spare)

Navigation amp

Diagnostic connector

Fog lamps

Park lamps, License lamps

High beam headlamps

Horn

Demand lighting (battery saver)

Cluster (battery)

Ignition switch feed

Audio mute (Start)

Camera (Run/Start)

Not used (Spare)

Restraints control module (RCM)

Not used (Spare)

Electronic stability control, Steering

angle

10A

Auxiliary body module (ABM)

Run/Start

10A

20A

Passive anti-theft system (PATS)

Not used (Spare)

217

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Roadside Emergencies

Fuse/Relay

Location

Fuse Amp

Rating

20A

Protected Circuits

Radio/Navigation

Not used (Spare)

Accessory delay (windows, automatic

dimming rear view mirror [including

microphone and compass] and door

switch III)

20A

15A

10A

Not used (Spare)

Heated seat relay coils

Not used (Spare)

Wiper relay and module, Blower relay

Passenger airbag deactivation

indicator (PADI), Occupant

classification sensor (OCS)

7.5A

30A Circuit Not used (Spare)

Breaker

—

Accessory delay relay (windows,

automatic dimming rear view mirror

[including microphone and compass]

and door switch III)

Power distribution box

The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment. The

power distribution box contains high-current fuses that protect your

vehicle’s main electrical systems from overloads.

Do not probe the contacts for the fuses and relays in the power

distribution box as damage will occur, causing improper, or loss

of, electrical functionality.

WARNING: Always disconnect the battery before servicing high

current fuses.

WARNING: To reduce risk of electrical shock, always replace

the cover to the Power Distribution Box before reconnecting the

battery or refilling fluid reservoirs.

218

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Roadside Emergencies

If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, refer to the

Battery section of the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.

The high-current fuses are coded as follows.

Fuse/Relay

Location

Fuse Amp

Rating

80A*

Protected Circuits

Passenger compartment fuse

panel

—

Not used

30A*

20A*

40A*

Blower motor relay

Powerpoint (body)

Rear defroster

Cooling fan relay

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)

pump

30A*

—

15A**

Wipers

ABS valve

Not used

Fuel pump relay

219

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Roadside Emergencies

Fuse/Relay

Location

Fuse Amp

Rating

15A**

Protected Circuits

Fuel pump relay #2 (Shelby only)

Intercooler pump relay

(Shelby only)

10A**

20A**

10A**

20A*

30A*

Heated seats

Alternator sense

Auxiliary body module (ABM)

Starter relay

Rear amplifier

(Shaker 1000 radio)

30A*

20A*

10A**

Powertrain relay

Powerpoint (instrument panel)

Powertrain control module (PCM)

keep-alive power

—

10A**

20A**

Not used

A/C compressor relay

Left high intensity discharge

headlamp relay

20A**

Right high intensity discharge

headlamp relay

—

30A*

—

30A*

Not used

Passenger front window

Not used

Passenger power seat

Driver power seat

Front amplifier

(Shaker 500 radio)

Driver front window motor

Convertible top motor

Fuel diode

Not used

30A*

40A*

Diode

—

5A**

Rear defroster coil (Run/Start)

220

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Roadside Emergencies

Fuse/Relay

Location

Fuse Amp

Rating

Protected Circuits

15A**

PCM Vehicle Power 4 – ignition

coil

G8VA relay

Fuel pump relay

Intercooler pump relay

(Shelby only)

G8VA relay

5A**

A/C compressor relay

Fuel pump relay #2 (Shelby only)

PCM Run/Start

PCM Vehicle Power 3 – general

powertrain components

PCM Vehicle Power 1

PCM Vehicle Power 5 –

transmission

5A**

15A**

PCM Vehicle Power 2 – emissions

related powertrain components

Full ISO relay Cooling fan relay (high)

Full ISO relay Blower motor relay

Full ISO relay Starter relay

Full ISO relay Rear defroster relay

Full ISO relay Front wiper relay

Full ISO relay Cooling fan relay (low)

High current

relay

Not used (Spare)

Full ISO relay PCM relay

High current

relay

Not used (Spare)

* Cartridge Fuses ** Mini Fuses

Auxiliary relay with heated seats (if equipped)

On heated seat equipped vehicles, there is a relay box located under the

driver seat containing two relays for the driver and passenger heated

seats.

221

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Roadside Emergencies

CHANGING THE TIRES

If you get a flat tire while driving, do not apply the brake heavily.

Instead, gradually decrease your speed. Hold the steering wheel firmly

and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road.

Note: The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) indicator light will

illuminate when the spare tire is in use. To restore the full functionality

of the monitoring system, all road wheels equipped with tire pressure

monitoring sensors must be mounted on the vehicle.

Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer in order to prevent damage

to the TPMS sensors, refer to Tire pressure monitoring system

(TPMS) in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter. Replace the spare

tire with a road tire as soon as possible. During repairing or replacing of

the flat tire, have the authorized dealer inspect the TPMS sensor for

damage.

WARNING: The use of tire sealants may damage your Tire

Pressure Monitoring System and should only be used if it is

supplied with your vehicle as part of the original temporary mobility

kit.

WARNING: Refer to Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)

in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for important

information. If the tire pressure monitor sensor becomes damaged, it

will no longer function.

Dissimilar spare tire/wheel information

WARNING: Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an

increased risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.

If you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel, then it is intended for

temporary use only. This means that if you need to use it, you should

replace it as soon as possible with a road tire/wheel that is the same size

and type as the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by

Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged, it should be

replaced rather than repaired.

222

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Roadside Emergencies

A dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that

is different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels

and can be one of three types:

1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire begins with the letter “T” for tire

size and may have “Temporary Use Only” molded in the sidewall

2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label on wheel: This spare tire has

a label on the wheel that states: “THIS TIRE AND WHEEL FOR

TEMPORARY USE ONLY”

When driving with one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above, do not:

• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)

• Load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the

Safety Compliance Label

• Tow a trailer

• Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare

tire

• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire at a time

• Use commercial car washing equipment

• Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire

Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above at any one wheel

location can lead to impairment of the following:

• Handling, stability and braking performance

• Comfort and noise

• Ground clearance and parking at curbs

• Winter weather driving capability

• Wet weather driving capability

3. Full-size dissimilar spare without label on wheel

When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel, do not:

• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h)

• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire/wheel at a time

• Use commercial car washing equipment

• Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare

tire/wheel

223

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Roadside Emergencies

The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel can lead to

impairment of the following:

• Handling, stability and braking performance

• Comfort and noise

• Ground clearance and parking at curbs

• Winter weather driving capability

• Wet weather driving capability

• All-Wheel driving capability (if applicable)

• Load leveling adjustment (if applicable)

When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel additional

caution should be given to:

• Towing a trailer

• Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body

• Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack

Drive cautiously when using a full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel and

seek service as soon as possible.

Stopping and securing the vehicle

1. Park on a level surface, set the

parking brake and activate the

hazard flashers.

2. Place the gearshift lever in P

(Park) (automatic transmission) or

R (Reverse) (manual transmission)

and turn the engine off.

Tire change procedure

WARNING: When one of the front wheels is off the ground, the

transmission alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or

slipping off the jack, even if the vehicle is in P (Park) (automatic

transmission) or R (Reverse) (manual transmission).

WARNING: To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you

change a tire, be sure the parking brake is set, then block (in

both directions) the wheel that is diagonally opposite (other side and

end of the vehicle) to the tire being changed.

224

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Roadside Emergencies

WARNING: If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else

could be seriously injured.

WARNING: Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the

vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to

avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the

wheel.

Note: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is

being jacked.

1. Block both the front and rear of

the wheel diagonally opposite the

flat tire. For example, if the left

front tire is flat, block the right rear

wheel.

2. Remove the lug wrench, spare

tire and jack.

225

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Roadside Emergencies

3. Remove the center ornament (if

equipped) from the wheel. Loosen

each wheel lug nut one-half turn

counterclockwise but do not remove

them until the wheel is raised off

the ground.

4. Put the jack in the jack notch

next to the tire you are changing.

Turn the jack handle clockwise until

the wheel is completely off the

ground.

Never use the rear differential

as a jacking point.

WARNING: To lessen the

risk of personal injury, do

not put any part of your body

under the vehicle while changing a

tire. Do not start the engine when

your vehicle is on the jack. The

jack is only meant for changing

the tire.

5. Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench.

6. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire, making sure the valve stem is

facing outward. Reinstall lug nuts until the wheel is snug against the hub.

Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been lowered.

If you are using the temporary tire, the lug nut washers will not appear

to be flush with the rim. This is normal only when using the temporary

spare tire.

226

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Roadside Emergencies

7. Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.

8. Remove the jack and fully tighten

the lug nuts in the order shown.

Refer to Wheel lug nut torque

specifications later in this chapter

for the proper lug nut torque

specification.

9. Put flat tire, wheel ornament (if

equipped), jack and lug wrench

away. Make sure the jack is fastened

so it does not rattle when you drive.

10. Unblock the wheel.

TEMPORARY MOBILITY KIT (IF EQUIPPED)

Your vehicle may be equipped with a temporary mobility kit (located in

the spare tire well in the trunk). The temporary mobility kit consists of

an air compressor to reinflate the tire and a sealing compound in a

canister that will effectively seal most punctures caused by nails or

similar objects. This kit will provide a temporary seal allowing you to

drive your vehicle up to 120 miles (200 km) at a maximum speed of

50 mph (80 km/h).

Note: The temporary mobility kit sealant compound in the canister is to

be used for one tire only. See your Ford authorized dealer for additional

replacement sealant canisters.

227

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Roadside Emergencies

1. Air compressor (inside)

2. Diverter knob

3. On/Off button

4. Air pressure gauge

5. Sealant bottle/canister

6. Sealant filling clear tube

7. Sealant tube — tire valve

connector

8. Yellow cap tool

9. Air compressor hose

10. Air hose — tire valve connector

11. Accessory power plug

12. Casing/housing

General information

WARNING: Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an

increased risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.

Do not attempt to repair punctures larger than ⁄4 inch (6.4 mm) or

damage to the tire’s sidewall. The tire may not completely seal.

Note: Do not use the temporary mobility kit if a tire has become

severely damaged by driving the vehicle with a tire that has insufficient

air pressure. Only punctured areas located within the tire tread can be

sealed with the temporary mobility kit.

Loss of air pressure may adversely affect tire performance. For this

reason:

• Do not drive the vehicle above 50 mph (80 km/h).

• Do not drive further than 120 miles (200 km). Drive only to the

closest Ford Motor Company authorized dealer or tire repair shop to

have your tire inspected.

• Drive carefully and avoid abrupt steering maneuvers.

• Periodically monitor tire inflation pressure in the affected tire; if the

tire is losing pressure, have the vehicle towed.

228

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Roadside Emergencies

• Read the information in the Tips for use of the temporary mobility

kit section to ensure safe operation of the temporary mobility kit and

your vehicle.

Tips for use of the temporary mobility kit

Read the following list of tips to ensure safe operation of the temporary

mobility kit:

• Before operating the temporary mobility kit, make sure your vehicle is

safely off the road and away from moving traffic. Turn on the hazard

lights.

• Always set the parking brake to ensure the vehicle doesn’t move

unexpectedly.

• Do not remove any foreign objects, such as nails or screws, from the

tire.

• When using the temporary mobility kit, leave the engine running

(only if the vehicle is outdoors or in a well-ventilated area) so

the compressor doesn’t drain the vehicle’s battery.

• Do not allow the compressor to operate continuously for more than

15 minutes; this will help prevent the compressor from overheating.

• Never leave the temporary mobility kit unattended when it is

operating.

• Sealant compound contains latex. Make sure that you use the

non-latex gloves provided to avoid an allergic reaction.

• Keep the temporary mobility kit away from children.

• Only use the temporary mobility kit when the ambient temperature is

between -22°F (–30°C) and 158°F (70°C).

• Only use the sealing compound before the use by date. The use by

date is on the lower right hand corner of the label located on the

sealant canister (bottle). Check the use by date regularly and

replace the canister after four years.

• Do not store the temporary mobility kit unsecured inside the

passenger compartment of the vehicle as it may cause injury during a

sudden stop or collision. Always store the kit in its original location.

• After sealant use, the TPMS sensor and valve stem on the wheel must

be replaced by an authorized Ford dealer.

• When inflating a tire or other objects, use the black air hose only. Do

not use the transparent hose which is designed for sealant application

only.

229

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Roadside Emergencies

• Operating the temporary mobility kit could cause an electrical

disturbance in radio and DVD player operation.

What to do when a tire is punctured

A tire puncture within the tire’s tread area can be repaired in two stages

with the temporary mobility kit:

• In the first stage, the tire will be reinflated with a sealing compound

and air. After the tire has been reinflated, you will need to drive the

vehicle a short distance (approximately 4 miles [6 km]) to distribute

the sealant in the tire.

• In the second stage, you will need to check the tire pressure and

adjust, if necessary, to the vehicle’s tire inflation pressure.

First stage: Reinflating the tire with sealing compound and air

Preparation

Park the vehicle in a safe, level and secure area, away from moving

traffic. Turn the hazard lights on. Apply the parking brake and turn the

engine off. Inspect the flat tire for visible damage.

Sealant compound contains latex. To avoid any allergic reactions, use the

non-latex gloves located in the accessory box on the underside of the

temporary mobility kit housing.

Do not remove any foreign object that has pierced the tire. If a puncture

is located in the tire sidewall, stop and call roadside assistance.

1. Remove the valve cap from the tire valve.

2. Unwrap the clear tube from the compressor housing.

3. Remove the tube cap and fasten the metal connector of the tube to

the tire valve, turning clockwise. Make sure the connection is tightly

fastened.

230

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Roadside Emergencies

4. Plug the power cable into the 12V

power point in the vehicle.

5. Remove the warning sticker found on the canister and place it on the

top of the instrument panel or the center of the dash.

6. Start the engine (only if the vehicle is outdoors or in a

well-ventilated area).

7. Turn dial (1) counterclockwise to

the sealant position. Turn on the kit

by pressing the on/off button (2).

8. Inflate the tire to the pressure

listed on the tire label located on

the driver’s door or the door jam

area.

Note: When the sealing compound is first added into the tire, the

air pressure gauge reading on the compressor unit may indicate a

higher value; this is normal and should be no reason for concern.

The pressure will drop after about 30 seconds of operation. The

231

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Roadside Emergencies

tire pressure has to be checked with the compressor in the OFF

position to get the correct tire pressure reading.

WARNING: Do not stand directly over the temporary mobility

kit while inflating the tire. If you notice any unusual bulges or

deformations in the tire’s sidewall during inflation, stop and call

roadside assistance.

WARNING: If the tire doesn’t inflate to the recommended tire

pressure within 15 minutes, stop and call roadside assistance.

9. When the recommended tire pressure is reached, turn off the kit by

pressing the on/off button; disconnect the kit from the tire valve and the

power point. Re-install the valve cap on the tire valve, place the tube cap

on the metal connector, and return the kit to the stowage area.

10. Immediately and cautiously, drive the vehicle 4 miles (6 km)

to distribute the sealant evenly inside the tire. Do not exceed

50 mph (80 km/h).

Note: If you experience any unusual vibration, ride disturbance or

noise while driving, reduce your speed until you can safely pull off to

the side of the road to call for roadside assistance. Do not proceed

to the second stage of this operation.

11. After 4 miles (6 km), stop and check the tire pressure. See Second

stage: Checking tire pressure.

Second stage: Checking tire pressure

Check the air pressure of your tires as follows:

1. Remove the valve cap from the tire valve.

2. Unhook the black hose from the side of the compressor and fasten

firmly on the valve stem by turning clockwise.

WARNING: If you are proceeding from the First stage:

Reinflating the tire with sealing compound and air section

and have injected sealant in the tire and the pressure is below 20 psi

(1.4 bar), stop and call roadside assistance. If tire pressure is

above 20 psi (1.4 bar), continue to the next step.

3. Turn the dial clockwise to the air position. Turn on the kit by pressing

the on/off button.

232

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Roadside Emergencies

4. Adjust the tire to the

recommended inflation pressure

from the tire label located on the

driver’s door or door jam area.

Note: The tire pressure has to be

checked with the compressor in the

OFF position to get the correct tire

pressure reading.

5. Turn the compressor off by

pressing the on/off button.

6. Unplug the hoses, re-install the valve cap on the tire and return the

kit to the stowage area.

WARNING: The power plug may get hot after use and should

be handled carefully while unplugging.

What to do after the tire has been sealed

After using the temporary mobility kit to seal your tire, you will need to

replace the sealant canister and clear tube (hose). Sealing compound

and spare parts can be obtained and replaced at an authorized Ford

Motor Company dealership or tire dealer. Empty sealant bottles may be

disposed of at home; however, liquid residue from the sealing compound

should be disposed by your local Ford Motor Company dealership or tire

dealer, or in accordance with local waste disposal regulations.

Note: After the sealing compound has been used, the maximum vehicle

speed is 50 mph (80 km/h) and the maximum driving distance is

120 miles (200 km). The sealed tire should be inspected immediately.

Note: After sealant use, the TPMS sensor and valve stem on the wheel

must be replaced by an authorized Ford dealer.

You can check the tire pressure any time within the 120 miles (200 km)

by performing the procedure from Second stage: Checking tire

pressure listed previously.

233

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Roadside Emergencies

Removal of the sealant canister from the temporary mobility kit

1. Unwrap the clear tube from the

compressor housing.

2. Locate the yellow cap at the end

of the clear tube.

3. Using the yellow cap tool, press

the tab located on the temporary

mobility kit compressor housing

while pulling up on the sealant

canister.

234

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Roadside Emergencies

Installation of the sealant canister to the temporary mobility kit

1. Align the sealant canister with

the temporary mobility kit housing.

2. Once aligned, seat the sealant

canister by lightly pushing down

until you hear an audible click.

3. Wrap the clear tube around the

compressor housing.

Note: If you experience any difficulties with the removal or installation

of the sealant canister, consult your Ford Motor Company authorized

dealer for assistance.

235

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Roadside Emergencies

Be sure to check the sealant

compound’s “use by” date regularly.

The “use by” date is on the lower

right hand corner of the label

located on the sealant canister

(bottle). The sealant canister should be replaced after four years.

WHEEL LUG NUT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque at 500 miles (800 km)

after any wheel disturbance (tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel

removal, etc.).

Bolt size

Wheel lug nut torque*

ft-lb

100

N•m

⁄

x 20

135

* Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and

rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners.

WARNING: When a wheel is installed, always remove any

corrosion, dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting

surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or

brake disc that contacts the wheel. Ensure that any fasteners that

attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with

the mounting surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct

metal-to-metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the

wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in

motion, resulting in loss of control.

Note: Inspect the wheel pilot hole

prior to installation. If there is

visible corrosion in wheel pilot hole,

remove loose particles by wiping

with clean rag and apply grease.

Apply grease only to the wheel pilot

hole surface by smearing a “dime”

(1 square cm) sized glob of grease

around the wheel pilot surface (1)

with end of finger. DO NOT apply

grease to lugnut/stud holes or

wheel-to-brake surfaces.

236

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Roadside Emergencies

RUNNING OUT OF FUEL

If you have run out of fuel and need to refill the vehicle with a portable

fuel container, see Running out of fuel in the Maintenance and

Specifications chapter for proper fuel filling method using a portable

fuel container and the included fuel filler funnel. Do not insert the

nozzle of portable fuel containers or any type of aftermarket funnels into

the Easy Fuel™ “no cap” fuel system as it can be damaged. You must

use the included funnel in such circumstances.

WARNING: Do not insert the nozzle of portable fuel containers

or aftermarket funnels into the Easy Fuel™ system. This could

damage the fuel system and its seal, and may cause fuel to run onto

the ground instead of filling the tank, all of which could result in

serious personal injury.

JUMP STARTING

WARNING: The gases around the battery can explode if

exposed to flames, sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could

result in injury or vehicle damage.

WARNING: Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin,

eyes and clothing, if contacted.

Do not attempt to push-start your automatic transmission

vehicle. Automatic transmissions do not have push-start

capability. Attempting to push-start a vehicle with an automatic

transmission may cause transmission damage.

Preparing your vehicle

When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the

automatic transmission must relearn its shift strategy. As a result, the

transmission may have firm and/or soft shifts. This operation is

considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the

transmission. Over time, the adaptive learning process will fully update

transmission operation.

1. Use only a 12–volt supply to start your vehicle.

2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could

damage the vehicle’s electrical system.

237

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Roadside Emergencies

3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle

making sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on

both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving

parts.

4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before

you attach the battery cables. Ensure that vent caps are tight and level.

5. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect from any electrical

surges. Turn all other accessories off.

Connecting the jumper cables

–

1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of

the discharged battery.

Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the

assisting (boosting) battery.

–

2. Connect the other end of the positive (+) cable to the positive (+)

terminal of the assisting battery.

238

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Roadside Emergencies

–

3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal of the

assisting battery.

–

4. Make the final connection of the negative (-) cable to an exposed

metal part of the stalled vehicle’s engine, away from the battery and the

carburetor/fuel injection system.

Note: Do not attach the negative (-) cable to fuel lines, engine rocker

covers, the intake manifold or electrical components as grounding

points.

WARNING: Do not connect the end of the second cable to the

negative (-) terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may

cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery.

5. Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts of

both engines, or any fuel delivery system parts.

Jump starting

1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at

moderately increased speed.

239

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Roadside Emergencies

2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.

3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both engines for an

additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables.

Removing the jumper cables

–

Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were

connected.

1. Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface.

Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the

assisting (boosting) battery.

–

2. Remove the jumper cable on the negative (-) connection of the

booster vehicle’s battery.

240

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Roadside Emergencies

–

3. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the booster

vehicle’s battery.

–

4. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the

disabled vehicle’s battery.

After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables

removed, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can

relearn its idle conditions.

241

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Roadside Emergencies

WRECKER TOWING

If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing

service or, if you are a member of a roadside assistance program, your

roadside assistance service provider.

It is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift and

dollies or flatbed equipment. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford Motor

Company has not approved a slingbelt towing procedure.

If your vehicle is to be towed from the front using wheel lift equipment,

it is recommended that the rear wheels (drive wheels) be placed on a

dolly to prevent damage to the transmission.

If your vehicle is to be towed from the rear using wheel lift equipment, it

is recommended that the front wheels be placed on a dolly to prevent

damage to the front fascia.

If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly, vehicle

damage may occur.

Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow

truck operators. Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for

proper hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle.

242

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Roadside Emergencies

Emergency towing

In case of a roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle (without access

to wheel dollies, car hauling trailer, or flatbed transport vehicle) your

vehicle (regardless of transmission powertrain configuration) can be flat

towed (all wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:

• Vehicle is facing forward so that it is being towed in a forward

direction.

• Place the transmission in N (Neutral). Refer to Brake-shift interlock

in the Driving chapter for specific instructions if you cannot move the

gear shift lever into N (Neutral).

• Maximum speed is not to exceed 35 mph (56 km/h).

• Maximum distance is 50 miles (80 km).

243

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Customer Assistance

GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED

Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be performed by an authorized

Ford, Lincoln, or Mercury dealer. While any authorized dealer handling

your vehicle line will provide warranty service, we recommend you

return to your selling authorized dealer who wants to ensure your

continued satisfaction.

Please note that certain warranty repairs require special training and/or

equipment, so not all authorized dealers are authorized to perform all

warranty repairs. This means that, depending on the warranty repair

needed, you may have to take your vehicle to another authorized dealer.

A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repair after taking your

vehicle to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be made using Ford or

Motorcraft௡ parts, or remanufactured or other parts that are authorized

by Ford.

Away from home

If you are away from home when your vehicle needs service, contact the

Ford Customer Relationship Center or use the online resources listed

below to find the nearest authorized dealer.

In the United States:

Mailing address

Ford Motor Company

Customer Relationship Center

P.O. Box 6248

Dearborn, MI 48121

Telephone

1-800-392-3673 (FORD)

(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)

Online

Additional information and resources are available online at

www.genuineservice.com.

• U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name, City/State, or Zip Code

• Owner Guides

• Maintenance Schedules

• Recalls

• Ford Extended Service Plans

• Ford Genuine Accessories

• Service specials and promotions.

244

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Customer Assistance

In Canada:

Mailing address (Ford vehicles)

Customer Relationship Centre

Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited

P.O. Box 2000

Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4

Telephone

1-800-565-3673 (FORD)

Online

www.ford.ca

Mailing address (Lincoln vehicles)

Lincoln Centre

Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited

P.O. Box 2000

Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4

Telephone

1-800-387-9333

Online

www.lincolncanada.com

Additional assistance

If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied with the service you

are receiving, follow these steps:

1. Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your

selling/servicing authorized dealer.

2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact the Sales

Manager, Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager.

3. If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company

policies, please contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center

In order to help you serve you better, please have the following

information available when contacting a Customer Relationship Center:

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

• Your telephone number (home and business)

• The name of the authorized dealer and city where located

• The vehicle’s current odometer reading

In some states, you must directly notify Ford in writing before pursuing

remedies under your state’s warranty laws. Ford is also allowed a final

repair attempt in some states.

245

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Customer Assistance

In the United States, a warranty dispute must be submitted to the BBB

AUTO LINE before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss Warranty

Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing replacement

or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws. This dispute

handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state created rights

or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty

Act or state replacement or repurchase laws.

IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)

California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer

or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the

vehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of

attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the

vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and

reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or

payable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer

use). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund

or replacement vehicle.

California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer

has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its

applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership

of a new vehicle or the first 18,000 miles (29,000 km), whichever occurs

first:

1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same non-conformity

likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR

2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity (a

defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or safety of

the vehicle) OR

3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of

more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time)

In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the

manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the

following address:

Ford Motor Company

16800 Executive Plaza Drive

Mail Drop 3NE-B

Dearborn, MI 48126

THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE PROGRAM

(U.S. ONLY)

Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor Company and to your dealer.

If a warranty concern has not been resolved using the three-step

246

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Customer Assistance

procedure outlined on the first page of the Customer Assistance section,

you may be eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO LINE program.

The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two parts – mediation and

arbitration. During mediation, a representative of the BBB will contact

both you and Ford Motor Company to explore options for settlement of

the claim. If an agreement is not reached during mediation and your

claim is eligible, you may participate in the arbitration process. An

arbitration hearing will be scheduled so that you can present your case

in an informal setting before an impartial person. The arbitrator will

consider the testimony provided and make a decision after the hearing.

You are not bound by the decision, but should you choose to accept the

BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford must abide by the accepted decision as

well. Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE program are usually

decided within forty days after you file your claim with the BBB.

BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the information provided below,

please call or write to request a program application. You will be asked

for your name and address, general information about your new vehicle,

information about your warranty concerns, and any steps you have

already taken to try to resolve them. A Customer Claim Form will be

mailed that will need to be completed, signed and returned to the BBB

along with proof of ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB will review the

claim for eligibility under the Program Summary Guidelines.

You can get more information by calling BBB AUTO LINE at

1-800-955-5100, or writing to:

BBB AUTO LINE

4200 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 800

Arlington, Virginia 22203–1833

BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be requested by calling the Ford

Motor Company Customer Relationship Center at 1-800-392-3673.

Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility

limitations, modify procedures, or to discontinue this process at any time

without notice and without obligation.

UTILIZING THE MEDIATION/ARBITRATION PROGRAM

(CANADA ONLY)

For vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealers. In those cases

where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of Canada and the

authorized dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle service concern

have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in an impartial

third party mediation/arbitration program administered by the Canadian

Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).

247

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Customer Assistance

The CAMVAP program is a straight forward and relatively speedy

alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a

settlement have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is

designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal

proceedings.

In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conduct

hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal

environment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the

parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolve

disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final as the arbitrator’s

award is binding to both you and Ford of Canada.

CAMVAP services are available in all territories and provinces. For more

information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial

Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685.

GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND CANADA

Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the

appropriate foreign embassy or consulate. These officials can inform you

of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel.

If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti-knock

index lower than is recommended for your vehicle, contact a regional

office or owner relations/customer relationship office.

The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may

damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause

engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company/Ford of

Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper

fuel. Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle

back into the U.S.

If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in

Central America, the Caribbean, or the Middle East, contact the nearest

authorized dealer. If the authorized dealer cannot help you, contact:

FORD MOTOR COMPANY

FORD EXPORT OPERATIONS

1555 Fairlane Drive

Fairlane Business Park #3

Allen Park, Michigan 48101

U.S.A.

Telephone: (313) 594-4857

FAX: (313) 390-0804

Email: expcac@ford.com

248

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Customer Assistance

If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest authorized

dealer. If the authorized dealer employees cannot help you, they can

direct you to the nearest Ford affiliate office.

If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate outside of

the U.S. or Canada, register your vehicle identification number (VIN) and

new address with Ford Motor Company Export Operations.

Customers in the U.S. should call 1-800-392-3673.

ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER’S LITERATURE

To order the publications in this portfolio, contact Helm, Incorporated at:

HELM, INCORPORATED

P.O. Box 07150

Detroit, Michigan 48207

Or to order a free publication catalog, call toll free: 1-800-782-4356

Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST

Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by their website:

www.helminc.com.

(Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card, check or

money order.)

Obtaining a French Owner’s Guide

French Owner’s Guides can be obtained from your authorized dealer or

by writing to:

Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited

Service Publications CHQ202

The Canadian Road

P.O. Box 2000

Oakville, ON, Canada

L6J 5E4

249

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Customer Assistance

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY)

If you believe that your vehicle has

a defect which could cause a crash

or could cause injury or death, you

should immediately inform the

National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and

if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a

recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved

in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor

Company.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at

1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;

or write to:

Administrator

1200 New Jersey Avenue, Southeast

Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from

http://www.safercar.gov.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (CANADA ONLY)

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or

could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport

Canada, using their toll-free number: 1–800–333–0510.

250

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Cleaning

WASHING THE EXTERIOR

Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral

pH shampoo, such as Motorcraft௡ Detail Wash (ZC-3-A), which is

available from your authorized dealer.

• Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing

or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted

surfaces.

• Using high pressure water or wand-type car washes may cause

damage to tape stripes if the nozzle is positioned closer than 12 inches

(30 cm) from the stripe.

• Never wash a vehicle that is “hot to the touch” or during exposure to

strong, direct sunlight.

• Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water for

best results.

• Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to

eliminate water spotting.

• It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the

winter months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause

damage to the vehicle.

• Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings

and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle’s

paintwork and trim over time. Use Bug and Tar Remover (ZC-42)

which is available from your authorized dealer.

• Remove any exterior accessories, such as antennas, before entering a

car wash.

• Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted

surface; if these substances come in contact with your vehicle,

wash off as soon as possible.

Exterior chrome

• Wash the vehicle first, using cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH

shampoo, such as Motorcraft௡ Detail Wash (ZC-3-A).

• Use Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15), available from your

authorized dealer. Apply the product as you would a wax to clean

bumpers and other chrome parts; allow the cleaner to dry for a few

minutes, then wipe off the haze with a clean, dry rag.

• Never use abrasive materials such as steel wool or plastic pads

as they can scratch the chrome surface.

251

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Cleaning

WAXING

• Wash the vehicle first.

• Do not use waxes that contain abrasives; use Motorcraft௡ Premium

Liquid Wax (ZC-53-A), which is available from your authorized dealer,

or an equivalent quality product.

• Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non-body

(low-gloss black) colored trim, such as grained door handles, roof

racks, bumpers, side moldings, mirror housings or the windshield cowl

area. The paint sealant will “gray” or stain the parts over time.

PAINT CHIPS

Your authorized dealer has touch-up paint to match your vehicle’s color.

Take your color code (printed on a sticker in the driver’s door jamb) to

your authorized dealer to ensure you get the correct color.

• Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar

spots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips.

• Always read the instructions before using the products.

ALUMINUM WHEELS AND WHEEL COVERS

Aluminum wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clearcoat paint

finish. In order to maintain their shine:

• Clean weekly with Motorcraft௡ Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A),

which is available from your authorized dealer. Heavy dirt and brake

dust accumulation may require agitation with a sponge. Rinse

thoroughly with a strong stream of water.

• Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or

covers.

• Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your

wheel rims or covers. Chemical-strength cleaners, or cleaning

chemicals, in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust

and dirt, could wear away the clearcoat finish over time.

• Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel

cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent.

• To remove tar and grease, use Motorcraft௡ Bug and Tar Remover

(ZC-42), available from your authorized dealer.

252

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Cleaning

ENGINE

Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt

buildup keep the engine warmer than normal. When washing:

• Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The

high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause

damage.

• Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the

engine block or other engine components.

• Spray Motorcraft௡ Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (ZC-20) on all

parts that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In Canada, use

Motorcraft௡ Engine Shampoo (CXC-66-A).

• Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running; water in the

running engine may cause internal damage.

• Never wash or rinse any ignition coil, spark plug wire or spark plug

well, or the area in and around these locations.

• Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning

the engine.

4.0L V6 ENGINE

253

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Cleaning

4.6L 3V V8 ENGINE

PLASTIC (NON-PAINTED) EXTERIOR PARTS

Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. These products are

available from your authorized dealer.

• For routine cleaning, use Motorcraft௡ Detail Wash (ZC-3-A).

• If tar or grease spots are present, use Motorcraft௡ Bug and Tar

Remover (ZC-42).

WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES

The windshield, rear and side windows and the wiper blades should be

cleaned regularly. If the wipers do not wipe properly, substances on the

vehicle’s glass or the wiper blades may be the cause. These may include

hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes, water repellent

coatings, tree sap, or other organic contamination; these contaminants

may cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades, and streaking and

smearing of the windshield. To clean these items, follow these tips:

• The windshield, rear windows and side windows may be cleaned with

a non-abrasive cleaner such as Motorcraft௡ Ultra-Clear Spray Glass

254

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Cleaning

Cleaner (ZC-23) in the U.S., or Premium Quality Windshield Washer

Fluid [CXC-37-(A, B, D, or F)] in Canada, available from your

authorized dealer.

• The wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or

Motorcraft௡ Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate (ZC-32-A),

available from your authorized dealer. This washer fluid contains

special solution in addition to alcohol which helps to remove the hot

wax deposited on the wiper blade and windshield from automated car

wash facilities. Be sure to replace wiper blades when they appear

worn or do not function properly.

• Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches.

• Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any parts.

If you cannot remove those streaks after cleaning with the glass cleaner

or if the wipers chatter and move in a jerky motion, clean the outer

surface of the windshield and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft

cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-abrasive cleaning solution. After

cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper blades with clean water. The

windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the windshield

with water.

CONVERTIBLE TOP AND PADDED MOLDING

For vinyl tops, wash with Motorcraft௡ Triple Clean (ZC-13), which is

available from your authorized dealer.

For cloth tops wash with a high quality convertible top

cleaner/protectant.

• Do not use stiff bristle brushes or abrasive materials or cleaners.

• Hot waxes applied by commercial car washes can affect the

cleanability of vinyl material.

• Using high water pressure or wand-type car washes against the

convertible top and windows may cause water leaks and possible seal

damage.

INSTRUMENT PANEL/INTERIOR TRIM AND CLUSTER LENS

Clean the instrument panel, interior trim areas and cluster lens with a

clean, damp, white cotton cloth, then use a clean and dry white cotton

cloth to dry these areas.

• Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper portion

of the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the

driver from undesirable windshield reflection.

255

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Cleaning

• Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in

contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan

lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted

surfaces.

• Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the

finish of the instrument panel, interior trim and cluster lens.

WARNING: Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents

when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid

contamination of the airbag system.

If a staining liquid like coffee/juice has been spilled on the instrument

panel or on interior trim surfaces, clean as follows:

1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean, white, cotton cloth.

2. Wipe the surface with a damp, clean, white cotton cloth. For more

thorough cleaning, use a mild soap and water solution. If the spot cannot

be completely cleaned by this method, the area may be cleaned using a

commercially available cleaning product designed for automotive

interiors.

3. If necessary, apply more soap and water solution or cleaning product

to a clean, white, cotton cloth and press the cloth onto the soiled

area–allow this to set at room temperature for 30 minutes.

4. Remove the soaked cloth, and if it is not soiled badly, use this cloth to

clean the area by using a rubbing motion for 60 seconds.

5. Following this, wipe area dry with a clean, white, cotton cloth.

INTERIOR

For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts and seats equipped with side

airbags:

• Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.

• Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft௡ Professional Strength

Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54).

• If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first

with Motorcraft௡ Spot and Stain Remover (ZC-14). In Canada, use

Motorcraft௡ Multi-Purpose Cleaner (CXC-101).

• If a ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning, clean the entire area

immediately (but do not oversaturate) or the ring will set.

• Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can

stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of

the seat materials.

256

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Cleaning

WARNING: Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the

vehicle’s safety belts, as these actions may weaken the belt

webbing.

WARNING: On vehicles equipped with seat-mounted airbags, do

not use chemical solvents or strong detergents. Such products

could contaminate the side-airbag system and affect performance of

the side airbag in a collision.

LEATHER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)

Your leather seating surfaces have a clear, protective coating over the

leather.

• For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth. For

more thorough cleaning, wipe the surface with a mild soap and water

solution. In Canada, use Motorcraft௡ Vinyl Cleaner (CXC-93). Dry the

area with a soft cloth.

• If the leather cannot be completely cleaned using a mild soap and

water solution, the leather may be cleaned using a commercially

available cleaning product designed for automotive leather.

• Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or

cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics, or oil/petroleum-based

leather conditioners. These products may cause premature wearing of

the clear, protective coating.

Note: In some instances, color or dye transfer can occur when wet

clothing comes in contact with leather upholstery. If this occurs, the

leather should be cleaned immediately to avoid permanent staining.

UNDERBODY

Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and

door drain holes free from packed dirt.

257

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Cleaning

FORD AND LINCOLN MERCURY CAR CARE PRODUCTS

Your Ford or Lincoln Mercury authorized dealer has many quality

products available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes. These

quality products have been specifically engineered to fulfill your

automotive needs; they are custom designed to complement the style

and appearance of your vehicle. Each product is made from high quality

materials that meet or exceed rigid specifications. For best results, use

the following products or products of equivalent quality:

Motorcraft௡ Bug and Tar Remover (ZC-42)

Motorcraft௡ Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15)

Motorcraft௡ Custom Clear Coat Polish (ZC-8-A)

Motorcraft௡ Detail Wash (ZC-3-A)

Motorcraft௡ Dusting Cloth (ZC-24)

Motorcraft௡ Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (U.S. only) (ZC-20)

Motorcraft௡ Engine Shampoo (Canada only) (CXC-66-A)

Motorcraft௡ Multi-Purpose Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-101)

Motorcraft௡ Premium Glass Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-100)

Motorcraft௡ Premium Liquid Wax (ZC-53-A)

Motorcraft௡ Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate (U.S. only)

(ZC-32-A)

Motorcraft௡ Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54)

Motorcraft௡ Spot and Stain Remover (U.S. only) (ZC-14)

Motorcraft௡ Tire Clean and Shine (ZC-28)

Motorcraft௡ Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (ZC-23)

Motorcraft௡ Vinyl Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-93)

Motorcraft௡ Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A)

258

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance and Specifications

SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS

To help you service your vehicle, we provide scheduled maintenance

information which makes tracking routine service easy.

If your vehicle requires professional service, your authorized dealer can

provide the necessary parts and service. Check your Warranty

Guide/Customer Information Guide to find out which parts and

services are covered.

Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts

conforming to specifications. Motorcraft௡ parts are designed and built to

provide the best performance in your vehicle.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE

• Do not work on a hot engine.

• Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts.

• Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed

space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation.

• Keep all open flames and other burning material (such as cigarettes)

away from the battery and all fuel related parts.

Working with the engine off

1. For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, set the parking

brake and shift to P (Park). For vehicles equipped with a manual

transmission, set the parking brake, press and hold the clutch pedal,

place the gearshift in 1 (First), and release the clutch pedal.

2. Turn off the engine and remove the key.

3. Block the wheels.

Working with the engine on

1. For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, set the parking

brake and shift to P (Park). For vehicles equipped with a manual

transmission, set the parking brake, press and hold the clutch pedal,

place the gearshift in N (Neutral), and release the clutch pedal.

2. Block the wheels.

WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or

personal burn injuries, do not start your engine with the air

cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running.

259

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance and Specifications

OPENING THE HOOD

1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood

release handle located on the

driver’s side kick panel.

2. Go to the front of the vehicle and release the auxiliary latch that is

located under the front center of

the hood.

3. Lift the hood and secure it with

the prop rod.

260

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance and Specifications

IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT

4.0L V6 engine

1. Battery

2. Engine oil filler cap

3. Engine oil dipstick

4. Brake fluid reservoir

5. Air filter assembly

6. Power steering fluid reservoir

7. Engine coolant reservoir

8. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

9. Power distribution box

261

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance and Specifications

4.6L 3V V8 engine

1. Battery

2. Engine oil filler cap

3. Engine oil dipstick

4. Brake fluid reservoir

5. Air filter assembly

6. Power steering fluid reservoir

7. Engine coolant reservoir

8. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

9. Power distribution box

262

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance and Specifications

Engine shield

Some vehicles may be equipped

with an aero-shield under the

engine. This shield needs to be

removed for service, including oil

and filter changes. It is secured with

four screws.

WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID

Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the

level is low. In very cold weather, do

not fill the reservoir completely.

Only use a washer fluid that meets

Ford specifications. Do not use any

special washer fluid such as

windshield water repellent type fluid

or bug wash. They may cause

squeaking, chatter noise, streaking

and smearing. Refer to

Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter.

State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the

use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive.

Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used

only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the

vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.

WARNING: If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below

40°F (5°C), use washer fluid with antifreeze protection. Failure

to use washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could

result in impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or

accident.

263

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance and Specifications

CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES

1. Pull the wiper blade and arm

away from the glass.

2. Squeeze the locking tabs to

release the blade from the arm and

pull the blade away from the arm to

remove it.

3. Attach the new blade to the arm and snap it into place.

Replace wiper blades at least once per year for optimum performance.

Poor wiper quality can be improved by cleaning the wiper blades and the

windshield. Refer to Windows and wiper blades in the Cleaning

chapter.

To prolong the life of the wiper blades, it is highly recommended to

scrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers. The

layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge of the

wiper rubber element.

ENGINE OIL

Checking the engine oil

Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate

intervals for checking the engine oil.

1. Make sure the vehicle is on level ground.

2. Turn the engine off and wait 15 minutes for the oil to drain into the

oil pan.

3. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P

(Park) (automatic transmissions) or 1 (First) (manual transmissions).

4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat.

264

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance and Specifications

5. Locate and carefully remove the engine oil level dipstick.

• 4.0L V6 engine

• 4.6L V8 engine

6. Wipe the dipstick clean. Insert the dipstick fully, then remove it again.

• If the oil level is between the lower and upper holes, the oil level

is acceptable. DO NOT ADD OIL.

265

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance and Specifications

• If the oil level is below the lower hole, add enough oil to raise the

level within the lower and upper holes.

• 4.0L V6 engine

• 4.6L V8 engine

• Oil levels above the upper hole may cause engine damage. Some oil

must be removed from the engine by an authorized dealer.

7. Put the dipstick back in and ensure it is fully seated.

266

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance and Specifications

Adding engine oil

1. Check the engine oil. For instructions, refer to Checking the engine

oil in this chapter.

2. If the engine oil level is not within the normal range, add only certified

engine oil of the recommended viscosity. Remove the engine oil filler cap

and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the opening.

3. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure the oil level is not above the

normal operating range on the engine oil level dipstick.

4. Install the dipstick and ensure it is fully seated.

5. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise

1/4 of a turn until three clicks are heard or until the cap is fully seated.

To avoid possible oil loss, DO NOT operate the vehicle with the

engine oil level dipstick and/or the engine oil filler cap removed.

Engine oil and filter recommendations

4.0L V6 Engine

Look for this certification

trademark.

Use SAE 5W-30 engine oil

Only use oils certified for gasoline engines by the American Petroleum

Institute (API). An oil with this trademark symbol conforms to the

current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel

economy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization and

Approval Committee (ILSAC), comprised of U.S. and Japanese

automobile manufacturers.

To protect your engine and engine’s warranty, use Motorcraft௡ SAE

5W-30 or an equivalent SAE 5W-30 oil meeting Ford specification

WSS-M2C929-A. Refer to Maintenance product specifications and

capacities later in this section for more information.

267

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance and Specifications

Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, cleaners or other engine

treatments. They are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that

is not covered by Ford warranty.

Change your engine oil according to the appropriate schedule listed in

the scheduled maintenance information.

Ford production and Motorcraft௡ replacement oil filters are designed for

added engine protection and long life. If a replacement oil filter is used

that does not meet Ford material and design specifications, start-up

engine noises or knock may be experienced.

It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft௡ oil filter or

another with equivalent performance for your engine application.

4.6L 3V V8 Engine

Look for this certification

trademark.

Use SAE 5W-20 engine oil

Only use oils “Certified For Gasoline Engines” by the American

Petroleum Institute (API). An oil with this trademark symbol conforms

to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel

economy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization and

Approval Committee (ILSAC), comprised of U.S. and Japanese

automobile manufacturers.

To protect your engine and engine’s warranty, use Motorcraft௡ SAE

5W-20 or an equivalent SAE 5W-20 oil meeting Ford specification

WSS-M2C930-A. SAE 5W-20 oil provides optimum fuel economy and

durability performance meeting all requirements for your

vehicle’s engine. Refer to Maintenance product specifications and

capacities later in this section for more information.

Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, cleaners or other engine

treatments. They are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that

is not covered by Ford warranty.

268

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance and Specifications

Change your engine oil according to the appropriate schedule listed in

the scheduled maintenance information.

Ford production and Motorcraft௡ replacement oil filters are designed for

added engine protection and long life. If a replacement oil filter is used

that does not meet Ford material and design specifications, start-up

engine noises or knock may be experienced.

It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft௡ oil filter or

another with equivalent performance for your engine application.

BATTERY

Your vehicle is equipped with a

Motorcraft௡ maintenance-free

battery which normally does not

require additional water during its

life of service.

If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it is reinstalled

after the battery has been cleaned or replaced.

For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and

dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to

the battery terminals.

If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables

from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the

acid with a solution of baking soda and water.

It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be

disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an

extended period of time. This will minimize the discharge of your battery

during storage.

Note: Electrical or electronic accessories or components added to the

vehicle by the dealer or the owner may adversely affect battery

performance and durability.

WARNING: Batteries normally produce explosive gases which

can cause personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks

or lighted substances to come near the battery. When working near the

battery, always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide

proper ventilation.

269

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance and Specifications

WARNING: When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive

pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the

vent caps, resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or

battery. Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on

opposite corners.

WARNING: Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries

contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing.

Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against

possible splashing of acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or

eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and

get prompt medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician

immediately.

WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories

contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.

Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically controlled by a computer,

some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery. When

the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the engine must

relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and

performance. To begin this process:

1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake.

2. Put the gearshift in P (Park) (automatic transmission) or the neutral

position (manual transmission), turn off all accessories and start the

engine.

3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature.

4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.

5. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.

6. Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process.

• The vehicle may need to be driven 10 miles (16 km) or more to

relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy.

• If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim, the idle

quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle

trim is eventually relearned.

When the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed, the

transmission must relearn its adaptive strategy. As a result of this, the

270

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance and Specifications

transmission may shift firmly. This operation is considered normal and

will not affect function or durability of the transmission. Over time the

adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation to its

optimum shift feel.

If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed,

the clock and the preset radio stations must be reset once the battery is

reconnected.

• Always dispose of automotive

batteries in a responsible manner.

Follow your local authorized

standards for disposal. Call your

local authorized recycling center

to find out more about recycling

automotive batteries.

RECYCLE

ENGINE COOLANT

Checking engine coolant

The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at the

intervals listed in scheduled maintenance information. The coolant

concentration should be maintained at 50/50 coolant and distilled water,

which equates to a freeze point of -34°F (-36°C). Coolant concentration

testing is possible with a hydrometer or antifreeze tester. The level of

coolant should be maintained at the FULL COLD level or within the

COLD FILL RANGE in the coolant reservoir. If the level falls below, add

coolant per the instructions in the Adding engine coolant section.

Your vehicle was factory-filled with a 50/50 engine coolant and water

concentration. If the concentration of coolant falls below 40% or above

60%, the engine parts could become damaged or not work properly. A

50/50 mixture of coolant and water provides the following:

• Freeze protection down to -34°F (-36°C).

• Boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).

• Protection against rust and other forms of corrosion.

• Proper function of calibrated gauges.

271

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance and Specifications

When the engine is cold, check the

level of the engine coolant in the

reservoir.

• The engine coolant should be at the FULL COLD level or within the

COLD FILL RANGE as listed on the engine coolant reservoir

(depending upon application).

• Refer to scheduled maintenance information for service interval

schedules.

If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval,

the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty. If the reservoir is

low or empty, add engine coolant to the reservoir. Refer to Adding

engine coolant in this chapter.

Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do not use engine

coolant/antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified

function and vehicle location.

Adding engine coolant

When adding coolant, make sure it is a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant

and distilled water. Add the mixture to the coolant reservoir, when the

engine is cool, until the appropriate fill level is obtained. If coolant is

filled to the COLD FILL RANGE or FULL COLD level when the engine is

not cool, the system will remain underfilled.

WARNING: Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot.

Steam and scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system

can burn you badly. Also, you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot

engine parts.

272

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance and Specifications

WARNING: Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer

fluid container. If sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant

could make it difficult to see through the windshield.

• DO NOT MIX different colors or types of coolant in your vehicle.

Make sure the correct coolant is used. DO NOT MIX recycled coolant

and new (unused) coolant together in the vehicle. Mixing of engine

coolants may harm your engine’s cooling system. The use of an

improper coolant may harm engine and cooling system components

and may void the warranty. Refer to Maintenance product

specifications and capacities in this chapter.

Note: Do not use stop leak pellets or cooling system sealants/additives

as they can cause damage to the engine cooling and/or heating systems.

This damage would not be covered under your vehicle’s warranty.

• A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added, in case

of emergency, to reach a vehicle service location. In this instance, the

cooling system must be drained and refilled with a 50/50 mixture of

engine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible. Water alone

(without engine coolant) can cause engine damage from corrosion,

overheating or freezing.

• Do not use alcohol, methanol, brine or any engine coolants

mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze (coolant). Alcohol

and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or

freezing.

• Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant. These

can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine

coolant.

For vehicles with overflow coolant systems with a non-pressurized cap

on the coolant recovery system, add coolant to the coolant recovery

reservoir when the engine is cool. Add the proper mixture of coolant and

water to the FULL COLD level. For all other vehicles which have a

coolant degas system with a pressurized cap, or if it is necessary to

remove the coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator of a vehicle with

an overflow system, follow these steps to add engine coolant.

WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, make sure the

engine is cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap.

The cooling system is under pressure; steam and hot liquid can come

out forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly.

273

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance and Specifications

Add the proper mixture of coolant and water to the cooling system by

following these steps:

1. Before you begin, turn the engine off and let it cool.

2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the coolant

pressure relief cap on the coolant reservoir (a translucent plastic bottle).

Slowly turn cap counterclockwise (left) until pressure begins to release.

3. Step back while the pressure releases.

4. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released, use the

cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap.

5. Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with the proper coolant mixture, to

within the COLD FILL RANGE or the FULL COLD level on the reservoir.

If you removed the radiator cap in an overflow system, fill the radiator

until the coolant is visible and radiator is almost full.

6. Replace the cap. Turn until tightly installed. Cap must be tightly

installed to prevent coolant loss.

After any coolant has been added, check the coolant concentration (refer

to Checking engine coolant). If the concentration is not 50/50

(protection to –34°F/–36°C), drain some coolant and adjust the

concentration. It may take several drains and additions to obtain a 50/50

coolant concentration.

Whenever coolant has been added, the coolant level in the coolant

reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle. If

necessary, add enough 50/50 concentration of engine coolant and

distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level.

If you have to add more than 1.0 quart (1.0 liter) of engine coolant per

month, have your authorized dealer check the engine cooling system.

Your cooling system may have a leak. Operating an engine with a low

level of coolant can result in engine overheating and possible engine

damage.

Recycled engine coolant

Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine

coolant since a Ford-approved recycling process is not yet available.

Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate

manner. Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling

and disposing of automotive fluids.

Coolant refill capacity

To find out how much fluid your vehicle’s cooling system can hold, refer

to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter.

274

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance and Specifications

Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant

in this section.

Severe climates

If you drive in extremely cold climates (less than –34°F [–36°C]):

• It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration

above 50%.

• NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%.

Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60% will

decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine

coolant and may cause engine damage.

• Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the

coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate

freeze protection at the temperatures in which you drive in the

winter months.

If you drive in extremely hot climates:

• It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration

above 40%.

• NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40%.

Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will

decrease the corrosion/freeze protection characteristics of the

engine coolant and may cause engine damage.

• Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the

coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate

protection at the temperatures in which you drive.

Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use a 50/50

mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system

and engine protection.

What you should know about fail-safe cooling (4.6L V8 engine

only)

If the engine coolant supply is depleted, this feature allows the vehicle to

be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred.

The “fail-safe” distance depends on ambient temperatures, vehicle load

and terrain.

How fail-safe cooling works

If the engine begins to overheat:

• The engine coolant temperature gauge

will move to the red (hot)

275

area.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance and Specifications

• The engine coolant temperature indicator will illuminate.

• The service engine soon indicator light will illuminate.

If the engine reaches a preset over-temperature condition, the engine

will automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation. Each disabled

cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine.

When this occurs the vehicle will still operate. However:

• The engine power will be limited.

• The air conditioning system will be disabled.

Continued operation will increase the engine temperature:

• The engine will completely shut down.

• Steering and braking effort will increase.

Once the engine temperature cools, the engine can be re-started. Take

your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible to minimize

engine damage.

When fail-safe mode is activated

You have limited engine power when in the fail-safe mode, so drive the

vehicle with caution. The vehicle will not be able to maintain high speed

operation and the engine will run rough. Remember that the engine is

capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine

damage, therefore:

1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine.

2. Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to an authorized dealer.

3. If this is not possible, wait a short period for the engine to cool.

4. Check the coolant level and replenish if low.

WARNING: Fail-safe mode is for use during emergencies only.

Operate the vehicle in fail-safe mode only as long as necessary to

bring the vehicle to rest in a safe location and seek immediate repairs.

When in fail-safe mode, the vehicle will have limited power, will not be

able to maintain high-speed operation, and may completely shut down

without warning, potentially losing engine power, power steering assist,

and power brake assist, which may increase the possibility of a crash

resulting in serious injury.

WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the

engine is running or hot.

276

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance and Specifications

5. Restart the engine and take your vehicle to an authorized dealer.

Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem

increases the chance of engine damage. Take your vehicle to an

authorized dealer as soon as possible.

FUEL FILTER

For fuel filter replacement, see your authorized dealer. Refer to

scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for

changing the fuel filter.

Replace the fuel filter with an authorized Motorcraft௡ part. The

customer warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel system

if an authorized Motorcraft௡ fuel filter is not used.

WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS

Important safety precautions

WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an

overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire.

WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If you hear

a hissing sound near the fuel filler door (Easy Fuel™ “no cap”

fuel system), do not refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may

spray out, which could cause serious personal injury.

WARNING: Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death

if misused or mishandled.

WARNING: Gasoline may contain benzene, which is a

cancer-causing agent.

Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel:

• Extinguish all smoking materials

and any open flames before

refueling your vehicle.

• Always turn off the vehicle before

refueling.

• Automotive fuels can be harmful

or fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as gasoline is highly toxic and if

277

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance and Specifications

swallowed can cause death or permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed,

call a physician immediately, even if no symptoms are immediately

apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours.

• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind

can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases,

excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious

illness and permanent injury.

• Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes,

remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and

seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could

lead to permanent injury.

• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is

splashed on the skin and/or clothing, promptly remove contaminated

clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or

prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.

• Be particularly careful if you are taking “Antabuse” or other forms of

disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline vapors,

or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In sensitive

individuals, serious personal injury or sickness may result. If fuel is

splashed on the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and

water. Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse

reaction.

WARNING: When refueling always shut the engine off and

never allow sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never

smoke while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain

conditions. Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes.

WARNING: The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can

produce static electricity, which can cause a fire if fuel is

pumped into an ungrounded fuel container.

278

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance and Specifications

Refueling

WARNING: Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause

severe injuries. To help avoid injuries to you and others:

• Read and follow all the instructions on the pump island;

• Turn off your engine when you are refueling;

• Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle;

• Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials away from fuel;

• Stay outside your vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump unattended

when refueling your vehicle — this is against the law in some places;

• Keep children away from the fuel pump; never let children pump

fuel.

• Do not use personal electronic devices while refueling. It can ignite

fuel vapors.

Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build-up when

filling an ungrounded fuel container:

• Place approved fuel container on the ground.

• DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle (including the

cargo area).

• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while

filling.

• DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill

position.

Easy Fuel™ “no cap” fuel system

Your fuel tank is equipped with an Easy Fuel™ “no cap” fuel filler

system. This allows you to simply open the fuel filler door and insert the

fuel filler nozzle into the fuel system. The Easy Fuel™ system is

self-sealing and protected against dust, dirt, water and snow/ice.

When fueling your vehicle:

1. Turn the engine off.

2. Open the fuel filler door.

3. Slowly insert the fuel filler nozzle fully into the fuel system. Pump fuel

as normal.

4. After you are done pumping fuel, wait about five seconds before

slowly removing the fuel filler nozzle. This allows residual fuel to drain

back into the fuel tank and not spill onto the vehicle.

279

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance and Specifications

Note: A fuel spillage concern may occur if overfilling the fuel tank. Do

not overfill the tank to the point that the fuel is able to bypass the fuel

filler nozzle. The overfilled fuel may run down the drain located within

the fuel filler housing and to the ground.

If the check fuel fill inlet light or CHECK FUEL FILL INLET message

comes on, the fuel fill inlet may not have properly closed. The inlet may

have stuck open or debris may be preventing the inlet from fully closing.

At the next opportunity, safely pull off the road, turn off the engine,

open the fuel filler door and remove any visible debris from the fuel fill

opening. Insert either the fuel fill nozzle or the fuel fill funnel (see

Refilling with a portable fuel container for funnel location) provided

with the vehicle several times to dislodge any debris and/or allow the

inlet to close properly. If this action corrects the problem, the check fuel

fill inlet light or CHECK FUEL FILL INLET message may not reset

immediately. It may take several driving cycles for the check fuel fill inlet

light or CHECK FUEL FILL INLET message to turn off. A driving cycle

consists of an engine start-up (after four or more hours with the engine

off) followed by city/highway driving. Continuing to drive with the check

fuel fill inlet light or CHECK FUEL FILL INLET message on may cause

the service engine soon lamp to turn on as well.

WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If you hear

a hissing sound near the fuel filler door (Easy Fuel™ “no cap”

fuel system), do not refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may

spray out, which could cause serious personal injury.

Choosing the right fuel

Use only UNLEADED fuel or UNLEADED fuel blended with a maximum

of 10% ethanol. Do not use fuel ethanol (E85), diesel, methanol, leaded

fuel or any other fuel. The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law and

could damage your vehicle.

280

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance and Specifications

Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic

compounds, including manganese-based additives.

Note: Use of any fuel other than those recommended may cause

powertrain damage, a loss of vehicle performance, and repairs may not

be covered under warranty.

Octane recommendations

Your vehicle is designed to use

“Regular” unleaded gasoline with a

pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.

Some stations offer fuels posted as

(R+M)/2 METHOD

“Regular” with an octane rating

below 87, particularly in high altitude areas. Fuels with octane levels

below 87 are not recommended.

Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly. However, if

it knocks heavily under most driving conditions while you are using fuel

with the recommended octane rating, see your authorized dealer to

prevent any engine damage.

Octane recommendations (4.6L V8 engine)

Your vehicle will run normally on 87 octane regular fuel without

damaging the engine, but premium fuel with an octane rating of 91

(R+M)/2 or higher is recommended for best overall performance.

For Shelby GT500 octane requirements, see the Shelby GT500

Supplement.

Fuel quality

If you are experiencing starting, rough idle or hesitation driveability

problems during a cold start, try a different brand of “Regular” unleaded

gasoline. Premium unleaded gasoline is not recommended for vehicles

designed to use “Regular” unleaded gasoline because it may cause these

problems to become more pronounced. If the problems persist, see your

authorized dealer.

Do not add aftermarket fuel additive products to your fuel tank. It

should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel

tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane

rating. These products have not been approved for your engine and

could cause damage to the fuel system. Repairs to correct the effects of

using an aftermarket product in your fuel may not be covered by your

warranty.

Many of the world’s automakers approved the World-Wide Fuel Charter

that recommends gasoline specifications to provide improved

281

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance and Specifications

performance and emission control system protection for your vehicle.

Gasolines that meet the World-Wide Fuel Charter should be used when

available. Ask your fuel supplier about gasolines that meet the

World-Wide Fuel Charter.

Cleaner air

Ford endorses the use of reformulated “cleaner-burning” gasolines to

improve air quality, per the recommendations in the Choosing the right

fuel section.

Running out of fuel

Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse

effect on powertrain components.

If you have run out of fuel:

• You may need to cycle the ignition from off to on several times after

refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to

the engine. On restarting, cranking time will take a few seconds longer

than normal.

• Normally, adding 1 gallon (3.8L) of fuel is enough to restart the

engine. If the vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep grade, more than

1 gallon (3.8L) may be required.

• The service engine soon

indicator may come on. For more

information on the service engine soon indicator, refer to Warning

lights and chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter.

Refilling with a portable fuel container

With the Easy Fuel™ “no cap” fuel system, use the following directions

when filling from a portable fuel container:

WARNING: Do not insert the nozzle of portable fuel containers

or aftermarket funnels into the Easy Fuel™ system. This could

damage the fuel system and its seal, and may cause fuel to run onto

the ground instead of filling the tank, which could result in serious

personal injury.

WARNING: Do not try to pry open or push open the Easy

Fuel™ system with foreign objects. This could damage the fuel

system and its seal and cause injury to you or others.

When filling the vehicle’s fuel tank from a portable fuel container, use the

funnel included with the vehicle.

282

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance and Specifications

1. Locate the white plastic funnel. It

is included with the tire changing

tools. (For vehicles equipped with

the temporary mobility kit, the

funnel is located in the spare tire

well in the trunk).

2. Slowly insert the funnel into the Easy Fuel™ system.

3. Fill the vehicle with fuel from the portable fuel container.

4. When done, clean the funnel or properly dispose of it. Extra funnels

can be purchased from your authorized dealer if you choose to dispose

of the funnel. Do not use aftermarket funnels; they will not work with

the Easy Fuel™ system and can damage it. The included funnel has

been specially designed to work safely with your vehicle.

ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY

Measuring techniques

Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you, the

driver. You must gather information as accurately and consistently as

possible. Fuel expense, frequency of fill-ups or fuel gauge readings are

NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy. We do not recommend

taking fuel economy measurements during the first 1,000 miles

(1,600 km) of driving (engine break-in period). You will get a more

accurate measurement after 2,000 miles–3,000 miles

(3,000 km–5,000 km).

Filling the tank

The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is equal to

the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Maintenance

product specifications and capacities section of this chapter.

The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and the

empty reserve combined. Indicated capacity is the difference in the

amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates

empty. Empty reserve is the small amount of fuel remaining in the fuel

tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty.

283

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance and Specifications

The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should

not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your

vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be

able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the

fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank.

For consistent results when filling the fuel tank:

• Turn the engine/ignition switch to the off position prior to refueling,

an error in the reading will result if the engine is left running.

• Use the same filling rate setting (low — medium — high) each time

the tank is filled.

• Allow no more than two automatic click-offs when filling.

• Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating.

• Use a known quality gasoline, preferably a national brand.

• Use the same side of the same pump and have the vehicle facing the

same direction each time you fill up.

• Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time.

Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent.

Calculating fuel economy

1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading

(in miles or kilometers).

2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added (in

gallons or liters).

3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the fuel tank and record

the current odometer reading.

4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer

reading.

5. Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel

economy:

Calculation 1: Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used.

Calculation 2: Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by total

kilometers traveled.

Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city

or highway). This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fuel

economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records

during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel

economy. In general, lower temperatures give lower fuel economy.

284

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance and Specifications

Driving style — good driving and fuel economy habits

Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change

a number of variables and improve your fuel economy.

Habits

• Smooth, moderate operation can yield up to 10% savings in fuel.

• Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel

economy.

• Idling for long periods of time (greater than one minute) may waste

fuel.

• Anticipate stopping; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop.

• Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy.

• Slow down gradually.

• Driving at reasonable speeds (traveling at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15%

less fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105 km/h]).

• Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy.

• Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy.

• You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if

unnecessary shifting between the top gears occurs. Unnecessary

shifting of this type could result in reduced fuel economy.

• Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and may

reduce fuel economy.

• Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fuel

economy.

• Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving.

Maintenance

• Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size.

• Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel

economy.

• Use recommended engine oil. Refer to Maintenance product

specifications and capacities in this chapter.

• Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items. Follow the

recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks

found in scheduled maintenance information.

Conditions

• Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may reduce fuel economy

at any speed.

285

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance and Specifications

• Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy (approximately

1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is lost for every 400 lb [180 kg] of weight carried).

• Adding certain accessories to your vehicle (for example bug

deflectors, rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski racks) may reduce

fuel economy.

• Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy.

• Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first

8–10 miles (12–16 km) of driving.

• Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to

driving on hilly terrain.

• Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top

cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal.

• Close windows for high speed driving.

EPA fuel economy estimates

Every new vehicle should have a sticker on the window called the

Monroney Label which contains EPA fuel economy estimates. Contact

your authorized dealer if the Monroney Label is not supplied with your

vehicle. The EPA fuel economy estimates should be your guide for the

fuel economy comparisons with other vehicles. Your fuel economy may

vary depending upon the method of operation and conditions.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a

catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with

applicable exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalytic

converter and other emission control components continue to work

properly:

• Use only the specified fuel listed.

• Avoid running out of fuel.

• Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at

high speeds.

• Have the items listed in scheduled maintenance information

performed according to the specified schedule.

The scheduled maintenance items listed in scheduled maintenance

information are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle

and to its emissions system.

If other than Ford, Motorcraft௡ or Ford-authorized parts are used for

maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting

286

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance and Specifications

emission control, such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine

Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability.

WARNING: Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass

or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the

engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.

Illumination of the service engine soon

indicator, charging system

warning light or the temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors,

smoke or loss of engine power could indicate that the emission control

system is not working properly.

An improperly operating or damaged exhaust system may allow exhaust

to enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or improperly operating exhaust

system inspected and repaired immediately.

WARNING: Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and

potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment.

Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By

law, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services,

sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not

permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent

it from working. Information about your vehicle’s emission system is on

the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the

engine. This decal also lists engine displacement.

Please consult your Warranty Guide/Customer Information Guide for

complete emission warranty information.

On-board diagnostics (OBD-II)

Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine’s

emission control system. This system is commonly known as the

on-board diagnostics system (OBD-II). The OBD-II system protects the

environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet

government emission standards. The OBD-II system also assists your

authorized dealer in properly servicing your vehicle. When the service

engine soon

a malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may cause the service engine

soon indicator to illuminate. Examples are:

indicator illuminates, the OBD-II system has detected

1. The vehicle has run out of fuel—the engine may misfire or run poorly.

2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel—the engine may misfire or run

poorly.

287

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance and Specifications

3. The fuel fill inlet may not have been properly closed. See Easy Fuel™

“no cap” fuel system in this chapter.

4. Driving through deep water—the electrical system may be wet.

These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank

with good quality fuel, properly closing the fuel fill inlet or letting the

electrical system dry out. After three driving cycles without these or any

other temporary malfunctions present, the service engine soon

indicator should stay off the next time the engine is started. A driving

cycle consists of a cold engine startup followed by mixed city/highway

driving. No additional vehicle service is required.

If the service engine soon

indicator remains on, have your vehicle

serviced at the first available opportunity. Although some malfunctions

detected by the OBD-II may not have symptoms that are apparent,

continued driving with the service engine soon

indicator on can

result in increased emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced engine and

transmission smoothness, and lead to more costly repairs.

Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing

Some state/provincial and local governments may have

Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs to inspect the emission control

equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could prevent

you from getting a vehicle registration. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M

test if the service engine soon

indicator is on or not working

properly (bulb is burned out), or if the OBD-II system has determined

that some of the emission control systems have not been properly

checked. In this case, the vehicle is considered not ready for I/M testing.

If the service engine soon

indicator is on or the bulb does not

work, the vehicle may need to be serviced. Refer to On-board

diagnostics (OBD-II) in this chapter.

If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has just been serviced, or the

battery has recently run down or been replaced, the OBD-II system may

indicate that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To determine if the

vehicle is ready for I/M testing, turn the ignition key to the on position

for 15 seconds without cranking the engine. If the service engine

soon

indicator blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not

ready for I/M testing; if the service engine soon

indicator stays on

solid, it means that the vehicle is ready for I/M testing.

The OBD-II system is designed to check the emission control system

during normal driving. A complete check may take several days. If the

288

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance and Specifications

vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, the following driving cycle consisting

of mixed city and highway driving may be performed:

15 minutes of steady driving on an expressway/highway followed by

20 minutes of stop-and-go driving with at least four 30-second idle

periods.

Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the

engine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle. The

engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once started,

do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete. If

the vehicle is still not ready for I/M testing, the above driving cycle will

have to be repeated.

POWER STEERING FLUID

Check the power steering fluid.

Refer to the scheduled maintenance

guide for the service interval

schedules.

1. Start the engine and let it run

until it reaches normal operating

temperature (the engine coolant

temperature gauge indicator will be

near the center of the normal area

between H and C).

2. While the engine idles, turn the

steering wheel to its furthest point

(until it stops) left and right several

times.

3. Turn the engine off.

4. Check the fluid level in the

reservoir. It should be between the

MIN and MAX lines. Do not add

fluid if the level is in this range.

5. If the fluid is low, add fluid in small amounts, continuously checking

the level until it reaches the range between the MIN and MAX lines. Be

sure to put the cap back on the reservoir. Refer to Maintenance

product specifications and capacities in this chapter for the proper

fluid type.

BRAKE/CLUTCH FLUID

Brake and clutch systems are supplied from the same reservoir.

289

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance and Specifications

The fluid level will drop slowly as

the brakes wear, and will rise when

the brake components are replaced.

Fluid levels between the MIN and

MAX lines are within the normal

operating range; there is no need to

add fluid. If the fluid levels are

outside of the normal operating

range, the performance of the

system could be compromised; seek

service from your authorized dealer

immediately.

TRANSMISSION FLUID

Checking automatic transmission fluid

The 5R55S transmission does not have a transmission fluid dipstick.

Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for scheduled

intervals for fluid checks and changes. Your transmission does not

consume fluid. However, the fluid level should be checked if the

transmission is not working properly, i.e., if the transmission slips or

shifts slowly or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage.

Transmission fluid should be checked and, if required, fluid

should be added by an authorized dealer.

Before adding any fluid, make sure the correct type is used. Use only

MERCON௡ V automatic transmission fluid. The type of fluid used is

indicated on the transmission fluid pan, extension housing. Refer to

Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter.

Use of a non-approved automatic transmission fluid may cause

internal transmission component damage and void the warranty.

Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments or

cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission

operation and result in damage to internal transmission components.

290

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance and Specifications

Checking and adding manual transmission fluid (if equipped)

1. Clean the filler plug.

2. Remove the filler plug and inspect the fluid level.

3. Note: There are two different manual transmissions used in this

vehicle and they have different fluid levels. For vehicles equipped with a

V6 engine, the correct manual transmission fill level is at the lower edge

of the filler hole. For vehicles equipped with a V8 engine, the correct

manual transmission fill level is 1/2 inch (1.3 cm) below the edge of the

filler hole.Note: For vehicles equipped with a V6 engine, the correct

manual transmission fill level is at the lower edge of the filler hole. For

vehicles equipped with a V8 engine, the correct manual transmission fill

level is 1/2 inch (1.3 cm) below the edge of the filler hole.

291

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance and Specifications

• Fill level for V6

• Fill level for V8

4. Add enough fluid through the filler opening to bring the fluid up to

the recommended levels.

5. Install and tighten the fill plug securely.

Use only fluid that meets Ford specifications. Refer to Maintenance

product specifications and capacities in this chapter.

AIR FILTER

Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate

intervals for changing the air filter element.

When changing the air filter element, use only the air filter element

listed. Refer to Motorcraft௡ part numbers in this chapter.

WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or

personal burn injuries do not start your engine with the air

cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running.

292

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance and Specifications

Changing the air filter element

V6 engine

V8 engine

1. Release the clamps that secure the air filter housing cover.

2. Remove the air filter element from the air filter housing.

3. Wipe the air filter housing and cover clean to remove any dirt or

debris and to ensure good sealing.

4. Install a new air filter element. Be careful not to crimp the filter

element edges between the air filter housing and cover. This could cause

filter damage and allow unfiltered air to enter the engine if not properly

seated.

5. Replace the air filter housing cover and secure the clamps. Be sure

that the air cleaner cover tabs are engaged into the slots of the air

cleaner housing.

Note: Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe

engine damage. The customer warranty may be void for any damage to

the engine if the correct air filter element is not used.

293

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance and Specifications

MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS

Component

Air filter element

Fuel filter

4.0L V6 engine

FA-1773

FG-1083

4.6L V8 engine

FA-1897

FG-1083

Battery

BXT-96R

Oil filter

Spark Plugs

FL-820-S

¹For spark plug replacement, see your authorized dealer. Refer to

scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for

changing the spark plugs.

Replace the spark plugs with ones that meet Ford material and

design specifications for your vehicle, such as Motorcraft௡ or

equivalent replacement parts. The customer warranty may be

void for any damage to the engine if such spark plugs are not

used.

294

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance and Specifications

295

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance and Specifications

296

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance and Specifications

297

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance and Specifications

298

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance and Specifications

ENGINE DATA

Engine

4.0L V6 engine

245

87 octane

1-4-2-5-3-6

EDIS

0.052–0.056 inch

(1.32–1.42 mm)

9.7:1

4.6L V8 engine

281

87 octane

1-3-7-2-6-5-4-8

Coil on plug

0.039–0.043 inch

(1.0–1.1 mm)

9.8:1

Cubic inches

Required fuel

Firing order

Ignition system

Spark plug gap

Compression ratio

For Shelby GT500 octane requirements, see the Shelby GT500

Supplement.

Engine drivebelt routing

• 4.0L V6 Engine

• 4.6L V8 Engine

299

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance and Specifications

IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE

Safety Compliance Certification Label

The National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration Regulations require

that a Safety Compliance

Certification Label be affixed to a

vehicle and prescribe where the

Safety Compliance Certification

Label may be located. The Safety

Compliance Certification Label is

located on the structure (B-Pillar)

by the trailing edge of the driver’s

door or the edge of the driver’s

door.

Vehicle identification number (VIN)

The vehicle identification number is

located on the driver side

instrument panel.

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

Please note that in the graphic,

XXXX is representative of your

vehicle identification number.

300

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance and Specifications

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) contains the following

information:

1. World manufacturer identifier

2. Brake system / Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating (GVWR) / Restraint

Devices and their location

3. Make, vehicle line, series, body

type

4. Engine type

5. Check digit

6. Model year

7. Assembly plant

8. Production sequence number

TRANSMISSION CODE DESIGNATIONS

You can find a transmission code on

the Safety Compliance Certification

Label. The following table tells you

which transmission each code

represents.

Description

Code

Five-speed manual (T5)

Five-speed manual (TR3650)

Five-speed automatic (5R55S)

301

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Accessories

GENUINE FORD ACCESSORIES FOR YOUR VEHICLE

A wide selection of Genuine Ford Accessories are available for your

vehicle through your local Ford or Ford of Canada dealer. These quality

accessories have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive

needs; they are custom designed to complement the style and

aerodynamic appearance of your vehicle. In addition, each accessory is

made from high quality materials and meets or exceeds Ford’s rigorous

engineering and safety specifications. Ford Motor Company will repair or

replace any properly dealer-installed Genuine Ford Accessories found to

be defective in factory-supplied materials or workmanship during the

warranty period, as well as any component damaged by the defective

accessories. The accessories will be warranted for whichever provides

you the greatest benefit:

• 12 months or 12,000 miles (20,000 km) (whichever occurs first), or

• the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty.

Contact your dealer for details and a copy of the warranty.

The following is a list of several Genuine Ford Accessories. Not all

accessories are available for all models. For a complete listing of the

accessories that are available for your vehicle, please contact your dealer

or visit our online store at: www.fordaccessories.com.

Exterior style

Body kits

Bug shields

Chrome exhaust tip

Fuel door

Front end covers

Grille inserts

Hood scoop

Racing stripes

Rear spoilers

Side scoops

Splash guards

Side window deflectors

Wheels

Interior style

Electrochromatic compass/temperature interior mirrors

Floor mats

302

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Accessories

Lifestyle

Ash cup / smoker’s package

Cargo organization and management

Peace of mind

Full vehicle covers

Remote start

Vehicle security systems

Wheel locks

For maximum vehicle performance, keep the following information in

mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle:

• When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your

vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of

the front or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety

Compliance Certification label). Consult your authorized dealer for

specific weight information.

• The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio

Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulate the use of mobile

communications systems — such as two-way radios, telephones and

theft alarms - that are equipped with radio transmitters. Any such

equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC

regulations and should be installed only by a qualified service

technician.

• Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your

vehicle, particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive

use.

• To avoid interference with other vehicle functions, such as anti-lock

braking systems, amateur radio users who install radios and antennas

onto their vehicle should not locate the Amateur Radio Antennas in

the area of the driver’s side hood.

• Electrical or electronic accessories or components that are added to

the vehicle by the authorized dealer or the owner may adversely affect

battery performance and durability.

303

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Ford Extended Service Plan

FORD ESP EXTENDED SERVICE PLANS

More than 30 million Ford, Lincoln, and Mercury owners have discovered

the powerful protection of Ford ESP. It is the only extended service plan

backed by Ford Motor Company, and provides “peace of mind”

protection beyond the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage.

Up to 500+ Covered Vehicle Components

There are four, new-vehicle Extended Service Plans with different levels

of coverage. Ask you dealer for details.

PremiumCare – Our most comprehensive coverage. With over 500

covered components, this plan is so complete that we generally only

discuss what’s not covered!

ExtraCare – Covers 113 components, and includes many high-tech

items.

BaseCare – Covers 84 components.

PowertrainCare – Covers 29 critical components.

Ford ESP is honored by all Ford, Lincoln and Mercury Dealers in

the U.S. and Canada It’s the only extended service plan authorized and

backed by Ford Motor Company. That means you get:

• Reliable, quality service anywhere you go.

• Factory-trained technicians.

• Genuine Ford and Motorcraft௡ Parts.

Rental car reimbursement

If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered repairs, you are

eligible for rental car coverage, including Bumper-to-Bumper warranty

repairs, or manufacturer’s recalls.

Transferable coverage

If you sell your vehicle before your Ford ESP coverage expires, you can

transfer any remaining coverage to the new owner. Whenever you’re

ready to sell your car, prospective buyers may feel better about taking a

risk on your used vehicle. Ford ESP may add resale value!

Plus, exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance, including:

• Towing, flat-tire change and battery jump starts.

• Out-of-fuel and lock-out assistance.

• Travel expense reimbursement for lodging, meals and rental car.

• Destination assistance for taxi, shuttle, rental car coverage and

emergency transportation.

304

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Ford Extended Service Plan

Ford ESP Can Quickly Pay for Itself

One service bill – the cost of parts and labor – can easily exceed the

price of your Ford ESP Service Contract. With Ford ESP, you minimize

your risk for unexpected repair bills and rising repair costs.

Avoid the rising cost of properly maintaining your vehicle!

Ford ESP also offers a Premium Maintenance Plan that covers items that

routinely wear out.

The coverage is prepaid, so you never have to worry about affording

your vehicle maintenance. It covers regular checkups, routine

inspections, preventive care and replacement of items that require

periodic attention for normal “wear”:

• Wiper blades

• Spark plugs

• Brake pads and linings

• Shock absorbers

• Belts and hoses

(except California)

• Clutch disc

Contact your selling Ford, Lincoln, or Mercury dealership today so they

can customize a Ford Extended Service Plan that fits your driving

lifestyle and budget.

Interest free finance options available

Take advantage of our installment payment plan, just a 10% down

payment will provide you with an affordable no interest, no-fee payment

opportunity.

305

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Ford Extended Service Plan

306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Index

Axle

lubricant specifications ..........295

refill capacities ........................295

traction lok ..............................202

Accessory delay ..........................79

AdvanceTrac ..............................197

AdvanceTrac Sport Mode .........202

Air cleaner filter ...............292–294

Battery .......................................269

acid, treating emergencies .....269

battery saver .............................59

jumping a disabled battery ....237

maintenance-free ....................269

replacement, specifications ...294

servicing ..................................269

Air conditioning ....................51, 54

manual heating and air

conditioning system .................51

Airbag supplemental restraint

system ........................129–130, 137

and child safety seats ............131

description ......................130, 137

disposal ....................................140

driver airbag ....................132, 138

indicator light .........................140

operation .........................132, 138

passenger airbag .............132, 138

side airbag ...............................137

Belt-Minder ௡ .............................125

Booster seats .............................156

Brakes ........................................195

anti-lock ...........................195–196

anti-lock brake system (ABS)

warning light ...........................196

fluid, checking and adding ....289

fluid, refill capacities ..............295

fluid, specifications .................295

lubricant specifications ..........295

parking ....................................196

shift interlock ..........................203

AM/FM .........................................32

Antifreeze

(see Engine coolant) ................271

Anti-lock brake system

(see Brakes) ......................195–196

Anti-theft system ..............101, 104

arming the system ..................105

disarming a triggered

Bulbs ............................................64

system .....................................106

Audio system (see Radio) .........32

Capacities for refilling fluids ....295

Cargo cover .................................89

CD ................................................32

Cell phone use ..............................8

Changing a tire .........................222

Automatic transmission ............204

driving an automatic

overdrive .................................204

fluid, adding ............................290

fluid, checking ........................290

fluid, refill capacities ..............295

fluid, specification ..................295

Child safety seats ......................145

attaching with tether

straps .......................................151

in front seat ............................146

Auxiliary input jack (Line in) ....41

Auxiliary power point .................76

307

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Index

in rear seat ..............................146

LATCH .....................................149

recommendations ...................143

Cruise control

(see Speed control) ....................80

Customer Assistance ................212

Ford Extended

Service Plan ............................304

Getting assistance outside the

U.S. and Canada .....................248

Getting roadside assistance ...212

Getting the service

you need .................................244

Ordering additional owner’s

literature .................................249

Utilizing the

Child safety seats - booster

seats ...........................................156

Cleaning your vehicle

engine compartment ..............253

instrument panel ....................255

interior .....................................256

plastic parts ............................254

washing ....................................251

waxing .....................................252

wheels ......................................252

wiper blades ............................254

Mediation/Arbitration

Program ...................................247

Climate control (see Air

conditioning or Heating) ......51, 54

Clock adjust

AM/FM .......................................33

Daytime running lamps

(see Lamps) ................................61

Clutch

Defrost

fluid ..........................................289

operation while driving ..........207

recommended shift speeds ....208

rear window and rearview

mirrors .......................................54

windshield .................................54

Compass, electronic ....................73

calibration .................................74

set zone adjustment .................74

Dipstick

automatic transmission

fluid ..........................................290

engine oil .................................264

Console ........................................75

Driving under special

conditions ..................................206

through water .........................211

Controls

power seat ...............................111

steering column ........................84

Convertible ..................................85

cleaning ...................................255

installation of the boot .............86

lowering the convertible top ...85

raising the convertible top ......88

Electronic message center ...20–21

Emergencies, roadside

jump-starting ..........................237

running out of fuel .........237, 282

Coolant

checking and adding ..............271

refill capacities ................274, 295

specifications ..........................295

Emission control system ..........286

Engine ........................................299

308

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Index

cleaning ...................................253

coolant .....................................271

fail-safe cooling .......................275

idle speed control ...................269

lubrication specifications .......295

refill capacities ........................295

service points ..................261–262

safety information relating to

automotive fuels .....................277

Fuel pump shut-off switch .......214

Fuses ..................................214–215

Engine block heater .................193

Gas cap (see Fuel cap) ............279

Engine oil ..................................264

checking and adding ..............264

dipstick ....................................264

filter, specifications ................294

refill capacities ........................295

specifications ..........................295

Gas mileage

(see Fuel economy) .................283

Gauges .........................................17

Event data recording ....................7

Exhaust fumes ..........................193

Hazard flashers .........................213

Headlamps ...................................59

aiming ........................................62

autolamp system .......................59

bulb specifications ....................65

daytime running lights .............61

flash to pass ..............................61

high beam .................................61

replacing bulbs .........................66

turning on and off ....................59

Fail safe cooling ........................275

Fluid capacities .........................295

Fog lamps ....................................60

Fuel ............................................277

calculating fuel

economy ............................28, 283

cap ...........................................279

capacity ...................................295

choosing the right fuel ...........280

comparisons with EPA fuel

economy estimates .................286

detergent in fuel .....................282

filler funnel .............................282

filling your vehicle

with fuel ..................277, 279, 283

filter, specifications ........277, 294

fuel pump shut-off switch .....214

improving fuel economy ........283

octane rating ...................281, 299

quality ......................................281

running out of fuel .........237, 282

Heating

heating and air conditioning

system .................................51, 54

Hood ..........................................260

Ignition ...............................190, 299

Infant seats

(see Safety seats) .....................145

Inspection/maintenance (I/M)

testing ........................................288

Instrument panel

cleaning ...................................255

cluster ........................................12

309

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Index

lighting up panel

and interior ...............................62

Lug nuts ....................................236

Lumbar support, seats .............111

Jack ............................................222

positioning ...............................222

storage .....................................222

Manual transmission .................207

fluid capacities ........................295

lubricant specifications ..........295

reverse .....................................208

Jump-starting your vehicle ......237

Message center .....................20–22

display color ..............................24

english/metric button ...............26

MyColor display ........................24

system check button ................22

warning messages .....................29

Keyless entry system

autolock ...............................92, 94

Keys .....................................91, 102

positions of the ignition .........190

Mirrors ...................................79–80

automatic dimming rearview

mirror ........................................79

heated ........................................54

side view mirrors (power) .......80

Lamps

autolamp system .......................59

bulb replacement

Motorcraft௡ parts ......258, 277, 294

specifications chart ..................65

daytime running light ...............61

fog lamps ...................................60

headlamps .................................59

headlamps, flash to pass ..........61

instrument panel, dimming .....62

interior lamps .....................64, 66

replacing bulbs .........................66

Navigation system .......................50

Octane rating ............................281

Oil (see Engine oil) ..................264

LATCH anchors .........................149

Lights, warning and indicator ....12

anti-lock brakes (ABS) ..........196

Limited slip axle

Parking brake ............................196

(see Traction Loc) ....................202

Parts

Load limits .................................180

(see Motorcraft௡ parts) ...........294

Locks ............................................91

autolock ...............................92, 94

doors ..........................................91

Passenger Occupant

Classification Sensor .................117

Power distribution box

(see Fuses) ...............................218

Lubricant specifications ...........295

310

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Index

Power mirrors .............................80

Power point .................................76

for children .............................140

Occupant Classification

Sensor ......................................117

warning light and

chime ...............................124–125

Power steering ..........................202

fluid, checking and adding ....289

fluid, refill capacity ................295

fluid, specifications .................295

Safety restraints - LA TCH

anchors ......................................149

Power Windows ...........................76

Safety seats for children ..........145

Safety Compliance

Certification Label ....................300

Radio ............................................32

6-CD in dash .............................32

Satellite Radio Information ........47

Seats ..........................................107

child safety seats ....................145

climate control ..........................54

front seats ...............................110

heated ................................51, 113

Rear-view camera system .........209

Recommendations for

attaching safety restraints for

children ......................................143

Relays ........................................214

SecuriLock passive anti-theft

system ........................................101

Remote entry system ...........96–97

illuminated entry ....................100

locking/unlocking doors .....97–98

opening the trunk .....................98

panic alarm ...............................98

replacement/additional

Servicing your vehicle ..............259

Setting the clock .........................33

SOS Post Crash Alert ...............140

Spark plugs,

specifications .....................294, 299

transmitters .............................100

replacing the batteries .............99

Specification

chart, lubricants ........................295

Roadside assistance ..................212

Speed control ..............................80

Starting your

vehicle ........................190–191, 193

jump starting ..........................237

Safety belts (see Safety

restraints) ..........115, 118, 120–123

Safety Canopy ...........................137

Safety defects, reporting ..........250

Steering wheel

controls ......................................84

tilting .........................................73

Safety restraints ...............115, 118,

120–124

Belt-Minder௡ ...........................125

extension assembly ................124

for adults .........................120–123

Stereo

6-CD in dash .............................32

CD-MP3 .....................................32

SYNC௡ ..........................................50

311

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Index

fluid, checking and adding

(automatic) .............................290

fluid, checking and adding

Temporary mobility kit .............227

Tilt steering wheel ......................73

(manual) .................................291

fluid, refill capacities ..............295

lubricant specifications ..........295

manual operation ....................207

Trunk ...........................................95

remote release ....................89, 98

Tire Pressure Monitoring

System (TPMS)

Tires, Wheels and Loading ....175

Tires ...........................160–161, 222

alignment ................................168

care ..........................................164

changing ..........................222, 224

checking the pressure ............164

inflating ...................................162

label .........................................174

replacing ..................................166

rotating ....................................168

safety practices .......................167

sidewall information ...............169

snow tires and chains ............179

spare tire .................................222

Temporary mobility kit ..........227

terminology .............................161

tire grades ...............................161

treadwear ........................160, 165

Turn signal ..................................64

USB port ......................................43

Vehicle Identification Number

(VIN) ..........................................300

Vehicle loading ..........................180

Ventilating your vehicle ...........193

Warning lights (see Lights) .......12

Washer fluid ..............................263

Water, Driving through .............211

Towing .......................................187

recreational towing .................189

trailer towing ..........................187

wrecker ....................................242

Windows

power .........................................76

Traction Control Sport Mode ...202

Traction-lok rear axle ...............202

Windshield washer fluid and

wipers ..........................................72

checking and adding fluid .....263

replacing wiper blades ...........264

Transmission

automatic operation ...............204

brake-shift interlock (BSI) ....203

Wrecker towing .........................242

312

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Euro Pro Vacuum Cleaner NV70 User Manual
Excalibur electronic MP3 Docking Station 133 User Manual
EXP Computer Network Card PCMCIA Ethernet Modem Adapter User Manual
Extron electronic Switch XTP T UWP 302 User Manual
Fender Musical Toy Instrument Bassman 500 User Manual
Fisher Price Baby Toy V2727 User Manual
Fundex Games Board Games 2612 User Manual
Furman Sound Power Supply PF Pro R User Manual
Furuno SONAR csh5l User Manual
Garmin Air Cleaner G2 User Manual